First Edition
00_MP_OM_EN_USC
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of
your Jeep
brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly
to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
©2023 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaUSA
mopar.com/om
COMPASS
COMPASS
| OWNER’S MANUAL
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do
not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident
and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention
o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while
the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle
is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states
or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for
common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (USA), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your
local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-877-426-5337 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or
purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal
minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may
also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and
equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make
additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Radio Instruction
Manual and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and
conditions of use, that are determined solely by FCA US LLC.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.
Vehicle images are for illustration purposes only. Actual products sold may vary.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION........................................................................... 7 1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................. 14 2
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ................................... 61 3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING .......................................................... 83 4
5 MULTIMEDIA ........................................................................... 133 5
6 SAFETY .................................................................................. 151 6
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY............................................................. 192 7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .................................................... 210 8
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................ 251 9
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE............................................................. 256
10
11 INDEX .................................................................................... 261
11
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY .......................8
ROLLOVER WARNING ..................8
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ....... 9
SYMBOL GLOSSARY ...................9
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
VEHICLE
KEYS ........................... 14
KeyFobs ...................... 14
SENTRY KEY .......................16
IGNITION SWITCH ....................16
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition ........... 16
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED ............ 17
How To Use Remote Start ............. 17
To Exit Remote Start Mode ............18
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped .....................18
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . 18
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer
Activation — If Equipped .............. 19
Remote Start Abort Message — If Equipped . . . 19
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ..............19
To Arm The System ................ 19
To Disarm The System ............... 20
Rearming Of The System ............. 20
Security System Manual Override ........ 20
DOORS .......................... 20
Manual Door Locks .................20
Power Door Locks .................21
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry ......21
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ....... 23
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit .........23
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors ..................... 23
STEERING WHEEL ....................24
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ........ 24
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ...... 24
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED .... 24
Programming The Memory Feature ........25
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Key Fob To Memory ............. 25
Memory Position Recall .............. 25
SEATS ..........................25
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped .....................26
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ......... 27
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped . 27
Heated Seats — If Equipped ........... 29
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped ....... 29
Head Restraints .................. 30
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS —
IF EQUIPPED .......................31
Introducing Voice Recognition ........... 31
Basic Voice Commands ..............31
Get Started ..................... 31
Additional Information ............... 31
MIRRORS ........................ 32
InsideRearviewMirror ............... 32
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors .............32
Outside Mirrors ................... 33
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal — If Equipped . 33
Power Adjustment Mirrors ............. 33
FoldingMirrors ................... 33
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .......... 33
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) —
If Equipped ....................... 34
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . . 34
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ...... 34
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code Or
Non-Rolling Code Device .............. 34
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener ........................ 34
Programming HomeLink® To A Miscellaneous
D
evice ........................ 35
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button . . 35
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ..... 36
Security ....................... 36
Troubleshooting Tips ................36
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ....................37
Multifunction Lever ................ 37
Headlight Switch ..................37
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If Equipped . 37
High/Low Beam Switch .............. 38
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped ..................... 38
Flash-To-Pass .................... 38
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .......38
Headlight Time Delay ............... 38
Lights-On Reminder ................ 38
Fog Lights — If Equipped ............. 38
Turn Signals .................... 39
Lane Change Assist ................39
Battery Saver Feature ...............39
INTERIOR LIGHTS .................... 39
Interior Courtesy Lights .............. 39
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ........ 40
Windshield Wiper Operation ............ 40
2
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped .......41
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...........42
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped ..... 42
CLIMATE CONTROLS ..................42
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions ...................... 42
Manual Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions ...................... 45
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...... 47
Climate Voice Commands ............. 47
Operating Tips ................... 47
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ........ 48
Storage ....................... 48
USB Control .....................49
Power Outlets — If Equipped ...........49
Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped ......50
WINDOWS ........................ 52
Power Window Controls .............. 52
Automatic Window Features ...........52
ResetAuto-Up .................... 52
Window Lockout Switch .............. 52
WindBuffeting ...................53
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE —
IF EQUIPPED .......................53
Opening And Closing The Sunroof ........ 53
Venting Sunroof ................... 54
Opening And Closing The Power
Sunshade ...................... 54
Pinch Protect Feature ............... 54
Sunroof Maintenance ...............54
HOOD ........................... 54
Opening The Hood .................54
Closing The Hood .................. 55
LIFTGATE .........................55
Unlock/Open The Liftgate ............. 55
Lock/Close The Liftgate ..............55
Power Liftgate — If Equipped ........... 56
Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped ........57
Cargo Area Features ................58
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ........59
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ......61
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster
Descriptions .................... 63
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .......... 64
Premium Instrument Cluster
Descriptions .................... 65
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ...........65
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls .......................65
Oil Change Reset ..................67
Display And Messages — If Equipped ...... 68
Instrument Cluster Display
MenuItems ..................... 69
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped ............... 73
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ..........74
Red Warning Lights ................. 74
Yellow Warning Lights ............... 76
Yellow Indicator Lights ............... 79
Green Indicator Lights ............... 79
White Indicator Lights ............... 80
Blue Indicator Lights ................ 81
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ...... 81
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ....................81
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ....................... 82
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE .................83
Normal Starting ................... 83
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ............. 83
Extended Park Starting .............. 84
After Starting — Warming Up The Engine .... 84
If Engine Fails To Start .............. 84
Stopping The Engine ................84
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .......84
PARK BRAKE ...................... 85
Electric Park Brake (EPB) ............. 85
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION .............. 87
Ignition Park Interlock ............... 88
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System ....................... 88
8-Speed Automatic Transmission ......... 88
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF EQUIPPED . . 92
Jeep® Active Drive ................. 92
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED ............93
Mode Selection Guide ............... 93
POWER STEERING.................... 93
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ........ 94
AutostopMode ................... 94
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop .......................94
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode . . 94
3
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . . 95
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . . 95
System Malfunction ................ 95
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED .... 95
Cruise Control .................... 95
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ...........97
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . 103
Activation/Deactivation .............103
Traffic Sign Assist Modes ............ 103
Indications On The Display ............ 104
HIGHWAY ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .....105
Operation ..................... 105
Turning Highway Assist On Or Off ........105
Indications On The Display ............ 106
System Status ................... 107
System Operation/Limitations .......... 107
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ............... 108
ParkSense Sensors ................ 108
ParkSense Warning Display ...........108
ParkSense Display ................ 108
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense .......111
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . 111
Cleaning The ParkSense System ........ 111
ParkSense System Usage Precautions .....111
Side Distance Warning (SDW) System ..... 112
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ...................... 113
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense
Active Park Assist System ............ 114
Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space
Assistance Operation ............... 114
Exiting The Parking Space ............ 116
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ...................... 118
Active Lane Management Operation ......118
Turning Active Lane Management On Or Off . . 118
Active Lane Management Warning Message . 118
Changing Active Lane Management Status . . 120
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ........120
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ......................121
Zoom View ..................... 123
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ...............123
VEHICLE LOADING ...................124
Certification Label ................ 124
TRAILER TOWING ...................125
CommonTowingDefinitions ...........125
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) .................. 126
Trailer And Tongue Weight ............127
Towing Requirements ..............127
TowingTips .................... 129
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME) ............... 129
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle ....................... 129
Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive
(FWD) Models ................... 130
Recreational Towing — 4X4 Models ....... 130
DRIVING TIPS......................130
On-RoadDrivingTips ............... 130
Off-RoadDrivingTips ...............130
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ................. 133
CYBERSECURITY ...................133
UCONNECT SETTINGS ................. 133
Customer Programmable Features ....... 134
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED ...................... 150
Radio Operation .................. 150
MediaMode .................... 150
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES .....150
Regulatory And Safety Information ....... 150
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES...................151
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ......... 151
Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA) .......151
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System .... 152
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ............157
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped . . 157
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped .............160
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . 162
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .......... 165
Occupant Restraint Systems
Features ...................... 165
Important Safety Precautions ..........165
Seat Belt Systems ................ 165
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) .....171
Child Restraints .................. 181
SAFETY TIPS ...................... 189
Transporting Passengers ............. 189
Transporting Pets ................ 189
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
TheVehicle .................... 189
4
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ...............190
Exhaust Gas ....................191
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ...........191
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ........... 192
SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED ............192
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED . . 194
Preparations For
Jacking ...................... 195
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage ....... 195
Jacking Instructions ............... 196
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ..........199
JUMP STARTING .................... 203
Preparations For Jump Start ........... 203
Jump Starting Procedure ............. 204
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY ............. 204
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............ 205
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ............. 206
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ............. 206
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ........... 207
Without The Key Fob ...............208
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models —
WithKeyFob ................... 208
4x4 Models .................... 208
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ...... 208
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS) .................... 209
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ........... 209
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ............... 210
Maintenance Plan ................. 210
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ............... 212
2.0L Engine ....................212
Checking Oil Level ................ 213
Adding Washer Fluid ............... 213
Maintenance-Free Battery ............ 213
Pressure Washing ................. 213
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ............... 214
Engine Oil ..................... 214
Engine Oil Filter ..................214
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............. 214
Air Conditioner Maintenance .......... 215
Body Lubrication .................216
Wiper Blades ................... 216
Exhaust System .................219
Cooling System .................. 219
Brake System ................... 222
Automatic Transmission .............222
Fuses .......................223
Bulb Replacement ................ 231
TIRES .......................... 236
TireSafetyInformation .............236
Tires — General Information ...........242
Tire Types ..................... 244
Spare Tires — If Equipped ............245
Tire Rotation Recommendations ........ 246
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ................ 246
Treadwear ..................... 247
Traction Grades .................. 247
Temperature Grades ............... 247
STORING THE VEHICLE ................ 247
BODYWORK....................... 248
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ......248
Body And Underbody Maintenance ....... 248
Preserving The Bodywork ............ 249
INTERIORS ....................... 249
Seats And Fabric Parts .............. 249
Plastic And Coated Parts ............. 250
Leather Surfaces ................. 250
Glass Surfaces .................. 250
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) ......251
BRAKE SYSTEM .................... 251
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ....251
Torque Specifications ............... 251
FUEL REQUIREMENTS .................252
2.0L Engine .................... 252
Reformulated Gasoline ............. 252
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends .......... 252
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ..... 252
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications .... 253
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline .......... 253
Materials Added To Fuel .............253
Fuel System Cautions .............. 253
FLUID CAPACITIES ................... 254
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ......... 254
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ........ 255
5
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .....................256
Prepare For The Appointment ..........256
Prepare A List ...................256
Be Reasonable With Requests ......... 256
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............256
Roadside Assistance ............... 256
FCA US LLC Customer Center ..........257
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Care ........ 257
Mexico ....................... 257
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ........ 257
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ........... 257
Service Contract ................. 257
WARRANTY INFORMATION .............. 258
MOPAR®PARTS ...................258
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............258
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .................258
In Canada .....................259
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............ 259
Change Of Ownership Or Address ..........259
General Information ..................259
6
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Jeep® vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details of
the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will
help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you
should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner’s Information,
which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your
vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact
an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep® best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your
satisfaction.
7
1
SYMBOLS KEY
WARNING! These statements apply to operating pro-
cedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION! These statements apply to procedures
that could result in damage to your
vehicle.
NOTE: A suggestion which will improve installa-
tion, operation, and reliability. If not fol-
lowed, may result in damage.
TIP: General ideas/solutions/suggestions on
easier use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW
Follow this reference for additional infor-
mation on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
If you do not read the entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This
vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many pas-
senger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applica-
tions. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the
higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other
vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that
can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a
collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe
or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce
disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is sig-
nificantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
Rollover Warning Label
8 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthi-
ness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be
observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when oper-
ating your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol
page 74.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
page 74
Brake Warning Light
page 74
Battery Charge Warning Light
page 75
Red Warning Lights
Door Open Warning Light
page 75
Drowsiness Detected Warning Light
page 75
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
page 75
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
page 75
Engine Temperature Warning Light
page 75
Hood Open Warning Light
page 75
INTRODUCTION 9
1
Red Warning Lights
Liftgate Open Warning Light
page 75
Oil Pressure Warning Light
page 76
Oil Temperature Warning Light
page 76
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
page 76
Transmission Fault Warning Light
page 76
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
page 76
Red Warning Lights
Vehicle Security Warning Light
page 76
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
page 76
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
page 76
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
page 77
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
page 77
Fuel Cutoff Warning Light
page 77
10 INTRODUCTION
Yellow Warning Lights
Fuel Level Sensor Failure Warning Light
page 77
Active Lane Management Warning Light
page 77
Service Active Lane Management Warning Light
page 77
Low Coolant Level Warning Light
page 77
Low Fuel Warning Light
page 77
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
page 77
Yellow Warning Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator (MIL) Warning Light
page 77
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Warning Light
page 78
Service 4WD Warning Light
page 78
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
page 78
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
page 78
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
page 78
INTRODUCTION 11
1
Yellow Warning Lights
Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light
page 79
Yellow Indicator Lights
4WD Low Indicator Light
page 79
4WD Lock Indicator Light
page 79
Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator Light
page 79
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Indicator Light
page 79
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator Light
page 79
Yellow Indicator Lights
Immobilizer Fail/VPS Electrical Alarm Indicator Light
page 79
Green Indicator Lights
Active Lane Management Indicator Light
page 80
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Indicator
Light
page 79
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Detected Light
page 80
Auto HOLD Indicator Light
page 80
Automatic High Beam Indicator Light
page 80
12 INTRODUCTION
Green Indicator Lights
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
page 80
Front Fog Indicator Light
page 80
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
page 80
Sport Mode Indicator Light
page 80
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
page 80
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
page 80
White Indicator Lights
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
page 81
Idle Coasting Indicator Light
page 80
Active Lane Management Indicator Light
page 81
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
page 80
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
page 81
INTRODUCTION 13
1
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOBS
Your vehicle is equipped with a keyless ignition key fob.
The keyless ignition key fob supports Passive Entry,
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
(if equipped), Remote Start (if equipped), and remote
power liftgate operation. The keyless ignition key fob
supports vehicles equipped with a START/STOP ignition
button. The keyless ignition key fob also includes an
emergency key, which is stored in the rear of the key
fob.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft
(20 m). The key fob does not need to be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE:
•
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the
key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or
other electronic device. This may result in poor
performance.
•
With the ignition on and the vehicle moving at
2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are disabled.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully
depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be verified
by referring to the instrument cluster, which will display
directions to follow
page 259.
To Unlock/Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once
to unlock the driver’s door. If selected within Uconnect
Settings, pushing the unlock button twice within five
seconds will unlock all the doors and the liftgate. To
lock all the doors and the liftgate, push the lock button
once
page 133.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will flash
and the illuminated entry system will be activated.
When the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash
and the horn will chirp.
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN or
START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display
along with an interior chime. An exterior audible and
visual alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along
with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.
NOTE:
•
The doors have to be open and then closed in order
for the vehicle to detect a key fob. The Key Left
Vehicle feature will activate when the first door is
closed and no key fob is detected in the vehicle. If
the warning has been activated, and the other doors
are closed, no other warnings will be issued.
•
These alerts will not be activated in situations where
either the vehicle’s engine is left running with the
key fob inside, or the key fob’s wireless signals are
blocked.
Key Fob
1 — Unlock Button
2 — Liftgate Button
3 — Emergency Key
4 — Lock Button
5 — Remote Start Button
6 — Panic Button
14
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
•
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery
dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin
battery dimensions.
•
Perchlorate material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
for further information.
•
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the
back housing or the printed circuit board.
Key Fob:
1. Remove the emergency key (2) by sliding the emer-
gency key release (1) on the back of the key fob and
pulling the emergency key out with your other hand.
2. Separate the key fob halves using a #2 flat-blade
screwdriver or a coin, and gently pry the two halves
of the key fob apart. Make sure not to damage the
seal during removal.
3. Remove the back cover to access and replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the (+)
sign on the battery to the (+) sign on the inside of
the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid
touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils
may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a bat-
tery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together.
WARNING!
•
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns in just two hours and
can lead to death.
•
If you think a battery may have been swallowed or
placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate
medical attention.
•
Keep new and used batteries away from children.
If the battery compartment does not close
securely, stop using the product and keep it away
from children.
Programming And Requesting
Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
•
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be repurposed and reprogrammed to another
vehicle.
•
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle.
Emergency Key Removal
1 — Emergency Key Release
2 — Emergency Key
Separating Case With A Coin
Key Fob Battery Replacement
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
2
WARNING!
•
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
•
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position when exiting the vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE:
•
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho-
rized dealer.
•
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to
match the vehicle locks.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The sys-
tem does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is
locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent unau-
thorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that
are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a
key fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for
a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb
check, it indicates that there is a problem with the elec-
tronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the
bulb check, it indicates that someone attempted to
start the engine with an invalid key fob. In the event
that a valid key fob is used to start the engine but there
is an issue with the vehicle electronics, the engine will
start and shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than
10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the elec-
tronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as
soon as possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics
page 259.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also consid-
ered an invalid key.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has three operating
modes. The three modes are OFF, ON/RUN, and START.
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
•
The engine is stopped.
•
Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm,
etc.) are still available.
START/STOP Ignition Button
1 — OFF
2 — ON/RUN
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ON/RUN
•
Driving mode.
•
All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate con-
trols, heated seats, etc.).
START
•
The engine will start.
NOTE:
If the ignition state/mode does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
depleted battery. In this situation, a backup method can
be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose
side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob
against the START/STOP ignition button and push to
operate the ignition.
WARNING!
•
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or oth-
ers could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Key-
less Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE:
•
For information on normal starting, see
page 83.
•
When opening the driver's door and the ignition is in
the ON/RUN (engine not running) position, a chime
will sound to remind you to place the ignition in the
OFF position. In addition to the chime, the “Vehicle
On” message will display in the cluster.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle
while still maintaining security. The system has
a range of approximately 328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambi-
ent conditions before the customer enters the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range
page 259.
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
•
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key
fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will
lock, the parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp
twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start, and
the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a
15 minute cycle. Pushing the Remote Start button a
third time shuts the engine off.
Starting The Ignition With Depleted Key Fob Battery
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
2
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button and place
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
•
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
•
Remote Start can only be used twice.
•
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
•
The parking lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
•
For security, power window and power sunroof
operation (if equipped) are disabled when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
•
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated
for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•
Gear selector in PARK
•
Doors closed
•
Hood closed
•
Liftgate closed
•
Hazard switch off
•
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•
Battery at an acceptable charge level
•
Panic button not pushed
•
System not disabled from previous Remote Start
event
•
Vehicle Security Light flashing (if equipped)
•
Ignition in the OFF position
•
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
•
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intrusion
•
Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
•
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start sys-
tem, push and release the START/STOP ignition button
prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if the
Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed again, or
if the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute
cycle. Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion, the climate controls will resume previously set
operations (temperature, blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
•
For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the ignition switch
must be in the ON/RUN position in order to drive the
vehicle.
•
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
— Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Push Start Button” will show in the instru-
ment cluster display until you push the START/STOP
ignition button.
•
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid
Remote Start request.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient
temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system will
automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes or
less. The timing is dependent on the ambient tempera-
ture. Once the timer expires, the system will automati-
cally adjust the settings depending on ambient condi-
tions. See “Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped” in the next section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT
SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear
defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather. The
heated steering wheel and driver heated seat feature
will turn on if programmed in the Comfort menu screen
within Uconnect Settings
page 133. In warm
weather, the driver vented seat feature will automati-
cally turn on when Remote Start is activated, if pro-
grammed in the Comfort menu screen. The vehicle will
adjust the climate control settings depending on the
outside ambient temperature.
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
The climate controls will automatically adjust to the
optimal temperature and mode settings depending on
the outside ambient temperature. This will occur until
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position where the
climate controls will resume their previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
•
In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or below,
the climate settings will default to maximum heat,
with fresh air entering the cabin. If the front defrost
timer expires, the vehicle will enter Mix mode.
•
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to
78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be based on
the last settings selected by the driver.
•
In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or above,
the climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level
mode, with Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control
settings, see
page 42.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start, or until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. The climate control settings will
change, and exit the automatic defaults, if manually
adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is in Remote
Start mode. This includes turning the climate controls
off using the OFF button.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD
WIPER DE-ICER ACTIVATION —
IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will
resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will
continue.
REMOTE START ABORT MESSAGE —
IF EQUIPPED
One of the following messages will display in the instru-
ment cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start
or exits Remote Start prematurely:
•
Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
•
Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
•
Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
•
Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Open
•
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
•
Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold
•
Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired
The message will stay active until the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors,
hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition for
unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security sys-
tem is armed, interior switches for door locks and lift-
gate release are disabled. If something triggers the sys-
tem, the Vehicle Security system will provide the
following audible and visible signals:
•
The horn will pulse
•
The turn signals will flash
•
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash
NOTE:
•
The Vehicle Security system is factory adjusted to
standards from different countries.
•
The Vehicle Security system is a complementary
security system developed to hinder the occurrence
of vehicle theft and prevent vandalism. It does not
prevent the theft of your vehicle; the system is a
deterrent.
•
The Vehicle Security system does not monitor glass
breakage or the movement of objects or people
inside the vehicle. The alarm does not intervene in
the case of vehicle tilt variations when it is parked.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
○
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry, make
sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition system is OFF.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
2
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
○
Push the lock button on the interior power door
lock switch with the driver and/or passenger
door open.
○
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob available
in the same exterior zone
page 21.
○
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the Vehicle
Security Light (located in the lower left portion of the
instrument cluster display) will begin to flash every
three seconds until it is disarmed.
NOTE:
If the system is armed by pushing the lock button on
the interior door panel, the Vehicle Security Light will
flash rapidly for about 15 seconds once the door is
closed, then slow down to every three seconds.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any
of the following methods:
•
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
•
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the
door
page 21.
•
Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to disarm
the system.
NOTE:
•
The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate button
on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Security system.
•
The Vehicle Security system remains armed during
power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will
not disarm the Vehicle Security system. If someone
enters the vehicle through the opened liftgate, then
opens any door, the alarm will sound.
•
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the inte-
rior power door lock switches will not unlock the
doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security system will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken
to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the
horn off after approximately 90 seconds, and then the
Vehicle Security system will rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL
OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The door locks can be manually locked from inside the
vehicle by using the door lock knob.
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each
door trim panel forward until the lock indicator is
shown. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door
handle to the first detent or rotate the door lock button
until the lock indicator is hidden. To unlock the rear
doors, rotate the door lock button until the lock indica-
tor is hidden. If the door lock button is locked (lock indi-
cator visible) when you shut the door, the door will
remain locked. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
Manual Door Lock Knob
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the Vehicle
Security system.
•
The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the
liftgate.
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and exit the vehicle.
•
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
If equipped with a Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition,
always make sure the keyless ignition is in the OFF
position, remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock the vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
equipment may cause severe personal injuries or
death.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num-
ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. Do not leave
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock switches are located on each front
door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors
and liftgate.
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position, and any door or the liftgate
is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents
you from accidentally locking the key fob in the vehicle.
Placing the ignition in the OFF position or closing the
doors and liftgate will allow the locks to operate.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ —
PASSIVE ENTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry. This feature
allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) with-
out having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
•
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off through
Uconnect Settings
page 133.
•
The key fob may not detect the Passive Entry system
if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or
other electronic device; these devices may block the
key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the Passive
Entry system from locking and unlocking the vehicle.
•
If wearing gloves, if it has been raining/snowing, or
there is salt/dirt covering the Passive Entry door
handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
•
The doors may unlock when water is sprayed on the
Passive Entry door handles, if the key fob is located
outside of the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the handle.
•
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will relock
and, if equipped, will arm the Vehicle Security system.
To Unlock From The Driver's Side Or Passenger’s Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
either front door handle, grab the door handle to unlock
the door automatically.
Power Door Lock Switch
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
2
•
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle,
depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect
system
page 133.
•
All doors and the liftgate will unlock when the front
passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive
Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
•
A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key
fob while a door is open.
•
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
•
A lock request is made by the door panel switch
while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
detects a Passive Entry key fob inside the vehicle and it
does not detect any Passive Entry key fobs outside the
vehicle, then the vehicle will unlock and alert the
customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid Pas-
sive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The
vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the follow-
ing conditions are true:
•
The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
•
Three attempts are made to lock the doors using
the door panel switch and then the doors are
closed.
•
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within
5 ft (1.5 m) of either front door handle, push the Pas-
sive Entry lock button located on the outside door
handle to lock the vehicle doors and liftgate.
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
NOTE:
•
After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the
doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked
by pulling the door handle without the vehicle
unlocking.
•
If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect set-
tings, the key fob protection described in "Frequency
Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)"
remains active/functional.
•
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key
fob battery is depleted.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release handle. With a valid Passive
Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the
electronic liftgate release handle to open.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
IF EQUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h).
The auto door lock feature is enabled or disabled by an
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see an authorized dealer for service.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1.
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The gear selector was not in PARK, then is placed in
PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
SYSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat-
blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the
dial to the lock or unlock position. When the system on
a door is engaged, that door can only be opened by
using the outside door handle even if the inside door
lock is in the unlocked position.
NOTE:
•
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door
lock is in the unlocked position.
•
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the desired position.
•
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock sys-
tem, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
•
For emergency exit with the system engaged, rotate
the door lock button until the lock indicator is hid-
den (unlocked position), roll down the window, and
open the door with the outside door handle.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children. After
engaging the child lock on both rear doors, check for
effective engagement by trying to open a door with the
internal handle. Once the Child-Protection Door Lock
system is engaged, it is impossible to open the doors
from inside the vehicle. Before getting out of the
vehicle, be sure to check that there is no one left
inside.
Electronic Liftgate Release Handle
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever
is located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or downward as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column,
pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as
desired. To lock the steering column in position, push
the control handle upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating ele-
ment that helps warm your hands in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel has only
one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until
the operator turns it off. The heated steering wheel may
not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control button through the climate screen or the con-
trols screen.
•
Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn
the heating element on.
•
Press the heated steering wheel button a second
time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
page 18.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabe-
tes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exer-
cise care when using the steering wheel heater. It
may cause burns even at low temperatures, espe-
cially if used for long periods.
•
Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steer-
ing wheel covers of any type and material. This
may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS —
IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile saves desired position set-
tings for the following features:
•
Driver seat position
•
Easy Entry/Exit seat (if equipped)
•
A set of desired radio station presets
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each can be
linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
The memory setting switch is located on the driver’s
door trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
•
The set (S) button, which is used to activate the
memory save function.
•
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall
either of two saved memory profiles.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY
FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing pro-
file from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat and radio station presets).
3. Push the set (S) button on the memory switch, and
then push the desired memory button (1 or 2) within
five seconds. The instrument cluster display will dis-
play which memory position is being set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK,
but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory
profile.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY KEY FOB
TO MEMORY
Your remote keyless entry key fob can be programmed
to recall one of two saved memory profiles.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fob you must select the
“Memory Linked To FOB” feature through the Uconnect
Settings
page 133.
To program your key fob, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
2. Select the desired memory profile (1) or (2).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory
switch, then within five seconds push and release
the button labeled (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory
Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument
cluster display.
4. Push and release the lock button on the key fob
within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory set-
tings by pushing the set (S) button, followed by pushing
the unlock button on the key fob within 10 seconds.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory posi-
tions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
PARK, a message will display in the instrument cluster
display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or two,
push the desired memory button number (1 or 2) or the
unlock button on the key fob linked to the desired
memory position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory
buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a recall is can-
celed, the driver seat will stop moving. A delay of one
second will occur before another recall can be selected.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of
the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Memory Switches
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
2
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (FRONT
SEATS) — IF EQUIPPED
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with manual front
seats. The seats can be adjusted forward or rearward
by using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion,
near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Seat Height Adjustment —
If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.
Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the out-
board side of the seat, lean back to the desired position
and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the
lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Fold-Forward Front Passenger Seat —
If Equipped
This feature allows for extended cargo space. When the
seat is folded flat, it is an extension of the load floor
surface (allowing long cargo to fit from the rear hatch
up to the instrument panel). The fold-forward seatback
has a softback surface that you can use as a work sur-
face when the seat is folded forward and the vehicle is
not in motion.
Pull upward on the recline lever to fold or unfold the
seat.
Front Seat Adjustment
Seat Height Adjustment
Recline Lever
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by sim-
ply unfolding the seats to the open position, over time
the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is danger-
ous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause
you to lose control. Adjust any seat only while the
vehicle is parked.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR
SEATS)
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With
Fold-Flat Feature
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can
be folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and
still maintains some rear seating room.
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
position the front seat to its mid-track position. Also, be
sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned
forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily.
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
TO LOWER THE REAR SEAT
1. Pull the seatback release lever located on either
side of the upper outer edge of the seat.
2. Fold that side of the rear seatback completely
forward.
TO RAISE THE REAR SEAT
NOTE:
If interference from the cargo area prevents the seat-
back from fully locking, you will have difficulty returning
the seat to its proper position.
Raise the seatback and lock it into place.
The release lever will show a red indicator while in the
unlocked position. Once the seat is locked in, the red
indicator will no longer be visible.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT
SEATS) — IF EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with a power driver's
seat and/or power passenger seat. The power seat
switch and power seat recliner switch are located on
the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use the
power seat switch to adjust seat height, angle, or
forward/rearward position. Use the power seat recline
switch to adjust the angle of the seatback.
Rear Seat Release Lever
1 — Seat Belt Guide
2 — Seatback Release Lever
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Height Adjustment
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down.
Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch, the
seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilt Adjustment
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of the
seat switch and the front of the seat cushion will move
in the direction of the switch.
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or
Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rear-
ward. Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward.
The seatback will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power
seat. Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the lum-
bar support.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning
to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting
the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you place the
vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
•
When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches
(60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is
greater than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) for-
ward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its pre-
viously set position when you place the vehicle’s
ignition in the RUN position.
•
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when
the driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch
(22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position,
there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat
for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry and
Easy Exit positions are stored in each memory setting
profile of the Driver Memory Settings
page 24.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when the
vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/
Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the
programmable features in the Uconnect Settings
page 133.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Recline Switch
Power Lumbar Switch
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabe-
tes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical condition must exer-
cise care when using the seat heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time.
•
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cush-
ion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could
cause serious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control buttons through
the climate screen or the controls screen.
•
Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI
setting on.
•
Press the heated seat button a second time to turn
the LO setting on.
•
Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
If your vehicle is equipped with a medium heat setting:
•
Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI
setting on.
•
Press the heated seat button a second time to turn
the MED setting on.
•
Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
LO setting on.
•
Press the heated seat button a fourth time to turn
the heating elements off.
If the HI level setting is selected, the system will auto-
matically switch to LO level after approximately 60 min-
utes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO
level setting will turn off automatically after approxi-
mately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
page 18.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard rear
seats are equipped with heated seats. The
heated seat switches for these seats are
located on the rear of the center console.
There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear
passengers to operate the seats independently. Indica-
tor lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO
and none for off.
•
Push the heated seat button once to turn the HI
setting on.
•
Push the heated seat button a second time to turn
the LO setting on.
•
Push the heated seat button a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
NOTE:
The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator
changes it.
FRONT VENTILATED SEATS —
IF EQUIPPED
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are
fans that draw the air from the passenger
compartment and move air through fine per-
forations in the seat cover to help keep the
driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient tem-
peratures. The fans operate at two speeds: HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the con-
trols screen.
•
Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
•
Press the ventilated seat button a second time to
choose LO.
•
Press the ventilated seat button a third time to turn
the ventilated seat off.
If your vehicle is equipped with a medium fan setting:
•
Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
•
Press the ventilated seat button a second time to
choose MED.
•
Press the ventilated seat button a third time to
choose LO.
•
Press the ventilated seat button a fourth time to
turn the ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
page 18.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
2
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the
top of the head restraint is located above the top of
your ear.
WARNING!
•
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
•
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear of
the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to gain
additional clearance to the back of your head.
Front Head Restraint Adjustment
Your vehicle is equipped with front two way driver and
passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint,
and push downward on the head restraint.
WARNING!
•
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
•
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by quali-
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see an authorized
dealer.
Rear Head Restraints
The rear head restraints have two positions: up or down.
When the center seat is being occupied, the head
restraint should be in the raised position. When there is
no occupant in the center seat, the head restraint can be
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint,
and push downward on the head restraint.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button
Outboard Head Restraint Adjustment Button
Center Head Restraint Adjustment Button
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by quali-
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS — IF EQUIPPED
INTRODUCING VOICE
RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these help-
ful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and
tips you need to know to control your vehicle’s Voice
Recognition (VR) system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following Voice Commands can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
or say the vehicle’s Wake Up
word, “Hey Uconnect” or “Hey Jeep®”. The factory
default Wake Up word is set to “Hey Uconnect” and can
be reprogrammed through the Uconnect Settings. After
the beep, say:
•
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
•
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
•
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate your
Voice Recognition system. You can also use the sys-
tem’s “Wake Up” word to activate voice recognition. The
Wake Up word can be set through the Uconnect Set-
tings
page 133.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
•
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passen-
ger conversations are examples of noise that may
impact recognition.
•
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead.
•
Each time you give a Voice Command, first push the
VR button
or say the “Wake Up” word, wait until
after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
•
You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a
Voice Command from the current category.
•
You can also interrupt the help message or system
prompts by speaking. This feature is called “barge-
in” and can be set through the Uconnect Settings
page 133.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2023 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM® and
all related marks and logos are trademarks of
SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
page 259.
For Uconnect system support, call 1-877-855-8400
(24 hours a day 7 days a week) or visit
DriveUconnect.com (US) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — For Vehicles Equipped With Navigation: Push The
Voice Recognition Button To Begin Radio, Media, Navi-
gation, Climate, Start Or Answer A Phone Call, And Send
Or Receive A Text
1 — For Vehicles Not Equipped With Navigation: Push
The Phone Button To Answer An Incoming Phone Call
2 — Push The Hang Up Button To End A Call Currently In
Progress
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
2
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
This is a single ball joint mirror that fixes to the wind-
shield with a counterclockwise rotation. No tools are
needed for mounting. The rearview mirror can be
adjusted left and right, or tilted up and down. The mir-
ror should be adjusted to center on the view through
the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to
the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The
mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position
(toward the windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped
This is a single ball joint mirror that fixes to the wind-
shield button with a counterclockwise rotation. No tools
are needed for mounting. The rearview mirror can be
adjusted left and right, or tilted up and down. The mir-
ror should be adjusted to center on the view through
the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s rear
view. If your vehicle is equipped with an on/off button
on the mirror, the mirror will default to on and can be
turned on/off through the touchscreen.
You can turn the Automatic Dimming Mirror feature on
or off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror
(if equipped). If your vehicle is not equipped with an
on/off button, the auto dimming feature is always on.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
the visors and lift the mirror cover.
Sun Visor Slide-On-Rod Feature —
If Equipped
The sun visor Slide-On-Rod feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor for additional sun blockage.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Button
Illuminated Vanity Mirror Cover
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The sun visor can also be extended while the sun visor
is against the windshield for additional sun blockage
through the front of the vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center of
the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the optimal view.
NOTE:
The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a
much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane
next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger
side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your pas-
senger side convex mirror could cause you to collide
with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS WITH TURN
SIGNAL — IF EQUIPPED
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
lighting contain LEDs, which are located in the upper
outer corner of each mirror.
The LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash with
the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and
rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning
flashers will also activate these LEDs.
POWER ADJUSTMENT MIRRORS
The power mirror control switch is located on the driv-
er's side door trim panel.
To adjust a mirror, rotate the control switch to the
desired mirror: (L) or (R). Then push the switch in the
direction that you want the mirror to move.
NOTE:
Once adjustment is complete, rotate the knob to the
neutral position to prevent accidental movements.
Power Folding — If Equipped
To fold the door mirrors in using the Power Folding Mir-
ror function, rotate the control switch to the power fold-
ing position. Rotating the control to the left, right, or
neutral position will return the mirrors to the driving
position.
If the power mirror control switch is moved again during
door mirror folding (from closed to open position and
vice versa), the movement direction is reversed.
Power mirror position can be saved as part of the Driver
Memory Settings (if equipped)
page 24.
FOLDING MIRRORS
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to
pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The
mirror has three detent positions: full forward, normal
and full rearward.
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice.
This feature will be activated whenever you
turn on the rear window defroster
(if equipped)
page 42.
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Neutral Position
2—LeftMirror
3 — Control Switch
4 — Right Mirror
5 — Power Folding Position (If Equipped)
Folding Exterior Mirror
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
2
Universal Garage Door Opener
(HomeLink®) — If Equipped
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
•
HomeLink® replaces up to three
hand-held transmitters that operate
devices such as garage door open-
ers, motorized gates, lighting, or
home security systems. The HomeLink® unit is pow-
ered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
•
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sunvisor designate the three
different HomeLink® channels.
•
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the
programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons
will activate the devices they are programmed to
with each press of the corresponding HomeLink®
button.
•
The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the
center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security sys-
tem is active
page 259.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of
the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it is recommended
that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmit-
ter of the device that is being programmed to the
HomeLink® system. Make sure your hand-held trans-
mitter is programmed to activate the device you are
trying to program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels of
your HomeLink® before you use it for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
CHANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons
(I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until the
HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE
A ROLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING
CODE DEVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether the
device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good
indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices
manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device
with a rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button located where the antenna is attached to the
device. The button may not be immediately visible when
looking at the device. The name and color of the button
may vary slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button you
normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a
rolling code. These devices will also not have a “LEARN”
or “TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate
your garage door opener motor, proceed as follows:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this pro-
cedure. You do not need to erase all channels when
programming additional buttons.
HomeLink® Buttons On Sun Visor
Scan me
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® but-
ton you wish to program, while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the garage door
opener transmitter button you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink® indica-
tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Once this
happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in
before moving on to the rolling code/non-rolling code
final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code
final step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can usu-
ally be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener motor. Firmly
push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button three times (holding the button
for two seconds each time). If the garage door
opener motor operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to con-
firm that the garage door opener motor operates. If
the garage door opener motor does not operate,
repeat the final steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on constantly, pro-
gramming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to con-
firm that the garage door opener motor operates. If
the garage door opener motor does not operate,
repeat the steps from the beginning.
WARNING!
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people or
pets are in the path of the door or gate.
•
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or con-
fined area while programming the transceiver.
Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and
can cause you and others to be severely injured or
killed.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
MISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a miscel-
laneous device follows the same procedure as program-
ming to a garage door opener
page 133
. Be sure to
determine if the device has a rolling code, or non-rolling
code before beginning the programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmit-
ter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to time-out in the same manner. The pro-
cedure may need to be performed multiple times to
successfully pair the device to your HomeLink®
buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
HOMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been
previously trained, without erasing all the channels,
proceed as follows. Be sure to determine whether the
new device you want to program the HomeLink® button
to has a rolling code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without
starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the HomeLink® indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Step 2
in “Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener” and follow all remaining steps.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
PROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmit-
ter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™,
place the ignition in the RUN position. Make sure
while programming HomeLink® with the engine on
that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that
the garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button
while you push and release (cycle) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may
take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The
garage door may open and close while you are
programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
○
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device
should activate when the HomeLink® button is
pushed.
○
To program the two remaining HomeLink® but-
tons, repeat each step for each remaining but-
ton. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® universal transmitter is disabled when
the Vehicle Security system is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the garage door opener hand-
held transmitter.
•
Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener
to complete the training for a rolling code.
•
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
•
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transmitter. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transmit-
ter. Do not program the transmitter if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
(Continued)
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Only use this transmitter with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener with-
out these safety features.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
turn signals, headlight beam selection and passing
lights. The multifunction lever is located on the left side
of the steering column.
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights
(if equipped), instrument panel lights, interior lights,
and fog lights (if equipped).
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF
detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the head-
light switch is placed in the parking lights position. How-
ever, the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be acti-
vated along with the front and rear marker lights. The
DRLs may be deactivated when the parking brake is
engaged.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking lights and instrument panel lights operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlights, parking lights and instrument panel lights
operation.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise from the parking lights and instrument panel
lights position to the first detent for headlights, parking
lights and instrument panel lights operation. Rotate the
headlight switch to the second detent for the AUTO
position.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS)
— IF EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights will turn on when the
engine is started and remain on unless the headlamps
are turned on or the ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
NOTE:
•
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running
Lights will automatically deactivate when the front
fog lights are turned on.
Multifunction Lever
Headlight Switch
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Front Fog Light Switch
3 — Ambient Lighting Control (If Equipped)
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Front Fog Light Switch
3 — Ambient Lighting Control (If Equipped)
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
•
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may
deactivate or reduce intensity on one side of the
vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that
side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when the haz-
ard warning lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling
the multifunction lever back will turn the low beams on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
HEADLAMP CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automat-
ing high beam control through the use of a digital cam-
era mounted on the windshield. This camera detects
vehicle specific light and automatically switches from
high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle
is out of view.
NOTE:
•
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off through Uconnect Settings
page 133.
•
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and tail-
lights of vehicles in the field of view will cause head-
lights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the wind-
shield or camera lens will cause the system to func-
tion improperly.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and
remain on, until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS —
IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent
for automatic headlight operation. When the system is
on, the headlight time delay feature is also on. This
means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds
after you place the ignition into the OFF position. To
turn the automatic system off, move the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will
come on in the automatic mode.
HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY
To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight delay
feature will leave the headlights on for up to
90 seconds.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the
OFF position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn
off the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the
headlights or parking lights on, or placing the ignition in
the ON/RUN position.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they
will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
•
The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate
this feature. If the headlight switch is in the AUTO
position prior to placing the ignition in the OFF posi-
tion, there is no need to turn the headlight switch to
off to activate Headlight Delay.
•
The headlight delay timing is programmable through
Uconnect Settings
page 133.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the igni-
tion is in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver's door is opened.
FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
switch.
Fog Light Switch
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights
or the low beam headlights and push the fog light but-
ton. To turn off the front fog lights, either push the fog
lights button a second time or turn off the headlight
switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE:
The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights
or parking lights on. However, selecting the high beam
headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Cornering Lights
The cornering lights are a feature to improve visibility at
night while turning the vehicle. When activated, a light
incorporated in the front fog light will illuminate on the
side of the vehicle the steering wheel is rotated or the
turn signal indicator is on. It can be activated through
the Uconnect system
page 133.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate the
turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster display flash to show proper operation.
NOTE:
•
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective
outside light bulb.
•
A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display and a continuous chime
will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile
(1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will flash
five times then automatically turn off.
BATTERY SAVER FEATURE
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 15 minutes after the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position. This will occur if the interior
lights were switched on manually or are on because a
door is open.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, or when the dimmer control is
rotated to its farthest upward position.
The front map/reading lights are turned on by the
switches in the center of the overhead console.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 15 minutes after the ignition is placed in
the OFF position. This will occur if the interior lights
were turned on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove compartment light and
the cargo area light. To restore interior light operation,
either place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, or
push the light switch on and then back off.
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the
headlight switch and is located on the driver’s side of
the instrument panel.
Rotating the instrument panel dimmer up or down will
adjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights
ONLY when the parking lights or headlights are turned
on, AND ONLY if the built in light sensor determines
that the ambient light levels are low enough that the
backlighting should be enabled.
Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
Overhead Light Switches
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
2
Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or down-
ward to increase or decrease the brightness of the
ambient light located in the overhead console, door
handle lights, lights under the instrument panel, door
map pocket lights, and cubby bin lights.
Ambient lights are only enabled when the headlights
are active.
Illuminated Entry — If Equipped
The Illuminated Entry feature allows you to activate the
low beam, parking lights, and side marker lights for
25 seconds when the vehicle is unlocked (through the
key fob or the Passive Entry door handles [if equipped]).
This feature can be activated or deactivated through
the Uconnect Settings
page 133.
NOTE:
•
When a door is open with the feature active, the
activation of the lights is extended for five seconds.
•
The feature is disabled when the vehicle is locked or
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on
the windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of
the steering column. The front wipers are operated by
rotating a switch, located on the end of the lever. For
information on the rear wiper/washer, see
page 42.
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first two detent
positions for intermittent settings. The first intermittent
wiper interval is 10 seconds. The second intermittent
wipe interval is based on vehicle speed. Rotate to the
third detent for low wiper operation and the fourth
detent for high wiper operation.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Instrument Panel Dimmer (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
Ambient Light Dimmer
Ambient Light Dimmer (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from returning to the parked
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
and the blades cannot return to the parked position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold
while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the
intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate
for several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and
then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off posi-
tion, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles,
then turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 to 30 seconds. Once
the lever is released the pump will resume normal
operation.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind-
shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Mist
Push the lever upward to the MIST position and release
for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer pump;
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the wind-
shield. The washer function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement, see
page 216.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS —
IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snow fall on the windshield
and automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end
of the multifunction lever to one of two detent positions
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position two is the most sen-
sitive. Place the wiper switch in the O (off) position
when not using the system.
NOTE:
•
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
•
The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the
windshield.
•
Use of products containing wax or silicone may
reduce Rain Sensing performance.
•
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
through Uconnect Settings
page 133.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for
the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under
the following conditions:
•
Change In Ignition Position — If the vehicle is in
Rain Sensing mode and the ignition is cycled from
OFF to ON, the auto wiper will be suppressed until
vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the
wiper switch is moved out of and back into the Inter-
mittent wipe position.
•
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — The Rain
Sensing system will not operate if the NEUTRAL gear
is selected at speeds of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less
unless the wiper switch is moved or the gear selec-
tor is moved out of NEUTRAL.
•
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with the Remote Start system, Rain Sensing wipers
are not operational when the vehicle is in Remote
Start mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and
has placed the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
Windshield Wiper Operation
1 — Push Lever Forward & Hold For Rear Washer
2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation
3 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
4 — Pull Lever & Hold For Front Washer Operation
5 — Push Lever Upward For Mist
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
position, Rain Sensing wiper operation can resume,
if it has been selected, and no other inhibit condi-
tions (mentioned previously) exist.
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the
windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the
steering column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by
rotating a switch, located at the middle of the lever.
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the
windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the
steering column. The rear wiper has different operation
modes:
•
Intermittent mode
•
Synchronous mode (at half speed of the front win-
dow wipers) when the front window wipers are
operating
•
Continuous mode
•
Vehicle in REVERSE: If the front wipers are active
and the REVERSE gear is selected, the wiper will
turn on for one wipe
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward
to the first detent for intermittent operation
and to the second detent for continuous rear
wiper operation.
To use the washer, push the lever forward
and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is
pushed while the wiper is in the off position,
the wiper will operate for several wipe cycles,
then turn off.
If the lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting,
the wiper will turn on and operate for several wipe
cycles after the end of the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 to 30 seconds. Once
the lever is released the pump will resume normal
operation.
WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield Wiper
De-Icer feature that may be activated under the follow-
ing conditions:
•
Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be activated automatically in the case
of a cold weather manual start with full front
defrost, and when the ambient temperature is
below 33°F (0.6°C).
•
Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be activated automatically when the
rear defrost is turned on and when the ambient tem-
perature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
•
Activation By Remote Start Operation (If Equipped)
— When Remote Start is active and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the
Windshield Wiper De-Icer will be enabled. Exiting
Remote Start will resume its previous operation. If
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer
and operation will continue.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen and on the instrument panel below the
radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
DESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on
the touchscreen to change the current set-
ting to the coldest output of air. The MAX A/C
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C
operation to exit. Pressing other settings will cause the
MAX A/C to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
Uconnect 5 With 10.1-inch Display Automatic Climate
Controls
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
A/C Button
Press and release the A/C button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the face-
plate to change the current setting. The A/C
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sys-
tem. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin.
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front
of the radiator and through the condenser. If the prob-
lem persists, please contact an authorized dealer.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touch-
screen, or push the button on the faceplate,
to change the system between recirculation
mode and outside air mode. The Recircula-
tion indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be
used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors,
dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be
used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable
(button on the touchscreen grayed out) if conditions
exist that could create fogging on the inside of the wind-
shield. The A/C can be deselected manually without
disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use
of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air
stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended.
NOTE:
•
After 25 minutes of continuous use, Recirculation
mode will automatically shut off for two minutes to
allow fresh air intake inside the cabin to maintain
sufficient oxygen levels.
•
Recirculation mode will function in this way, in either
automatic or manual override mode.
AUTO Button
Press and release this button on the touch-
screen, or push the button on the faceplate,
to change the current setting. The AUTO indi-
cator illuminates when AUTO is on. This fea-
ture automatically controls the interior cabin tempera-
ture by adjusting distribution and amount of airflow.
Toggling this function will cause the system to switch
between manual override mode and automatic modes
page 47.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the touchscreen button,
or push and release the button on the face-
plate, to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator
illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from
the windshield and side window demist outlets. When
the defrost button is selected, the blower level may
increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum tempera-
ture settings for the best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging performance. When toggling
the front defrost mode button, the Climate Control sys-
tem will return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the button on the touch-
screen, or push and release the button on
the faceplate, to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and
a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Driver And Passenger Temperature
Control Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and passenger with
independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate or touch-
screen or press and slide the temperature bar
towards the red arrow button on the touch-
screen for warmer temperature settings.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
Push the blue button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the tempera-
ture bar towards the blue arrow button on
the touchscreen for cooler temperature
settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen
to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC
indicator is illuminated when SYNC is on.
SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the Climate
Control system. There are seven blower
speeds available. Adjusting the blower will
cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation.
The speeds can be selected using either the blower
control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the
touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower con-
trol knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The
blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control
knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower set-
ting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower
bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Mode Control regulates the airflow distribu-
tion. The airflow distribution outlets are:
instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
defrost outlets, and demist outlets.
Faceplate
Push the Mode button to change the airflow distribution
mode.
Touchscreen
Press one of the MODE buttons to change the airflow
distribution mode.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
vanes of the center outlets and outboard
outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to
regulate airflow direction. There is a shut-off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the
amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side win-
dow demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer
air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost,
side window demister outlets, and panel
outboard outlets.
Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side win-
dow demist outlets. When the defrost button
is selected, the blower level may increase.
Use Defrost mode with maximum tempera-
ture settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front
defrost mode button, the Climate Control system will
return to the previous setting.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is ideal for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield. A slight amount of air is
also directed through the panel outboard outlets.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on the
touchscreen, or push and release the OFF
button on the faceplate to turn the Climate
Control ON/OFF.
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
DESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
MAX A/C Setting
Press and release the MAX A/C button on
the touchscreen to change the current set-
ting to the coldest output of air. The MAX A/C
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C
operation to exit. Pressing other settings will cause the
MAX A/C to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Condi-
tioning (A/C). The A/C indicator illuminates
when A/C is on.
NOTE:
•
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off,
but the A/C system shall remain active to prevent
fogging of the windows.
•
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower
speed if needed.
•
If your air conditioning performance seems lower
than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
(located in front of the radiator), for an accumula-
tion of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water
spray from the front of the radiator and through the
condenser.
Recirculation Button
Push the Recirculation button to change the
system between recirculation mode and out-
side air mode. The Recirculation indicator and
the A/C indicator illuminate when the Recircu-
lation button is pressed. Recirculation can be used when
outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all
modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavail-
able if conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected
manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the
inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended
use of this mode is not recommended.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if equipped,
the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode
to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation is
disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempt-
ing to use Recirculation while in this mode causes the
LED in the control button to blink and then turns off.
Front Defrost Setting
Press and release the touchscreen button,
or push and release the button on the face-
plate, to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator
illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from
the windshield and side window demist outlets. When
the defrost button is selected, the blower level may
increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum tempera-
ture settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front
defrost mode button, the Climate Control system will
return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the button on the touch-
screen, or push and release the button on
the faceplate, to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and
a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
Uconnect 5 With 10.1-inch Display Manual Climate
Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
2
CAUTION!
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Temperature Control
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of the
air forced through the climate system.
Push the red button on the faceplate, or
touchscreen, or press and slide the tempera-
ture bar towards the red arrow button on the
touchscreen for warmer temperature
settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate, or
touchscreen, or press and slide the tempera-
ture bar towards the blue arrow button on
the touchscreen for cooler temperature
settings.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air
forced through the Climate Control system.
There are seven blower speeds available.
Adjusting the blower will cause automatic
mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can
be selected using either the blower control knob on the
faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower con-
trol knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The
blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control
knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower set-
ting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower
bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Push the Mode Control button to change the
airflow distribution mode. The airflow distri-
bution mode can be adjusted so air comes
from the instrument panel outlets, floor out-
lets, defrost outlets, and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
vanes of the center outlets and outboard
outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to
regulate airflow direction. There is a shut-off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the
amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side win-
dow demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer
air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side win-
dow demist outlets. When the defrost button
is selected, the blower level may increase.
Use Defrost mode with maximum tempera-
ture settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front
defrost mode button, the Climate Control system will
return to the previous setting.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is ideal for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF
Press and release this button on the touch-
screen, or push and release the button on
the faceplate to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE
CONTROL (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen (if equipped) on the Auto-
matic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the sys-
tem to maintain by adjusting the temperature con-
trol buttons. Once the desired temperature is dis-
played, the system will achieve and automatically
maintains that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it
is not necessary to change the settings. You experi-
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
•
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings
for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically
adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed
to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
•
The temperature can be displayed in US or Metric
units by selecting the US/Metric customer-
programmable feature.
To provide you with maximal comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan remains on
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase
in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual over-
ride features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display
will be turned off when the system is being used in the
manual mode.
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep every-
one comfortable while you keep moving ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the
beep, say one of the following commands:
•
“Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
•
“Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated
seats or steering wheel if equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for sug-
gested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
sion protection and to protect against engine overheat-
ing. OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is
recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is func-
tioning properly and the proper amount, type, and con-
centration of coolant is used. Use of the Air
Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recom-
mended, because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control sys-
tem when the vehicle is being stored for an extended
period of time, see
page 247.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower
speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C
for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves.
Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow,
and if they enter the air distribution box, they could plug
the water drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service
your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when
needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
2
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
The windshield wiper De-Icer is a heating element
located at the base of the windshield.
It operates automatically once the following conditions
are met:
•
Activation By Front Defrost
The wiper De-Icer activates automatically during a
cold weather manual start with full defrost, and
when the ambient temperature is below 33°F
(6°C).
•
Activation By Rear Defrost
The wiper De-Icer activates automatically when the
Rear Defrost is operating and the ambient tempera-
ture is below 33°F (6°C).
•
Activation By Remote Start Operation
When Remote Start is activated and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (6°C) the
windshield wiper De-Icer is activated. Exiting
Remote Start will resume its previous operation. If
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer
and operation will continue.
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather
And Vehicle
Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel
Mode),
(MAX A/C) on, and
blower on high. Roll down the win-
dows for a minute to flush out the
hot air. Adjust the controls as
needed to achieve comfort.
Warm
Weather
Turn
(A/C) on and set the mode
control to
(Panel Mode).
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Cool Sunny Operate in (Bi-Level Mode).
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control to
(Mix
Mode) and turn
(A/C) on to
keep windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
(Floor
Mode). If windshield fogging starts to
occur, move the control to
(Mix
Mode).
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger
side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove compartment
in the open position. Driving with the glove compart-
ment open may result in injury in a collision.
Console Storage Compartment
To open, pull up on the latch and lift the cover.
The center console has a storage area which can hold
cell phones, PDAs, and other small items. The center
console can slide forward and rearward for comfort.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a
collision.
Glove Compartment
Center Console
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
USB CONTROL
This feature allows an external USB device to be
plugged into one of the USB ports, located in the center
stack of the instrument panel.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port will acti-
vate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® features, if
equipped. For further information, refer to “Android
Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same time, and
both ports will provide charging capabilities. Only one
port can transfer data to the system at a time.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A USB
port and another device is plugged into the Type C USB
port, a message will appear and allow you to select
which device to use.
Different scenarios are listed below when a non-phone
device is plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports,
and when a phone device is plugged into the smaller
and larger USB ports:
•
“A new device is now connected. Previous connec-
tion was lost.”
•
“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous connection
was lost.”
•
“Another device is in use through the same USB
port. Please disconnect the first device to use the
second device.”
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may cause
the connection to a previous device to be lost.
By using a USB cable to connect an external device:
•
The device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing the artist, track title, and album
information on the radio display.
NOTE:
Depending on track configuration, track information
may not be present on the radio display.
•
The device can be controlled using the radio buttons
to play, and browse the contents of the device.
•
The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB port.
The second row USB ports can be used to charge an
external device.
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only USB
ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media
USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen
that the device is not supported by the system.
POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp)
power outlets that can be used to power cellular
phones, small electronics and other low powered elec-
trical accessories. The power outlets are labeled with
either a “key” or a “battery” symbol to indicate how the
outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled with a key sym-
bol are powered when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position, while the outlets labeled with a battery symbol
are connected directly to the battery, and powered at all
times.
Front USB Ports
1—TypeCUSBPort
2—TypeAUSBPort
Charge Only Rear USB Ports
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
2
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the battery powered out-
lets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle
is not in use to protect the battery against discharge.
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If equipped, the front power outlet is located on the
center stack of the instrument panel.
If equipped, a power outlet is located in the rear cargo
area.
NOTE:
The rear cargo area power outlet can be switched from
ignition-only to constant battery powered all the time.
See an authorized dealer for details.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an elec-
tric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the gen-
erator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD —
IF EQUIPPED
Front Power Outlet
Rear Cargo Area Power Outlet — If Equipped
Wireless Charging Pad
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi® wire-
less charging pad located below the center stack,
within the storage compartment. This charging pad is
designed to wirelessly charge your Qi® enabled mobile
phone. Qi® is a standard that allows wireless charging
of your mobile phone.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi® wireless
charging. If the phone is not equipped with Qi® wireless
charging functionality, an aftermarket sleeve or a spe-
cialized back plate can be purchased from your mobile
phone provider or a local electronics retailer. Please
see your phone’s owner’s manual for further
information.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip
mat to hold your mobile phone in place, and an LED
indicator light.
Place the device inside the prepared area delimited in
the mat as shown in the image. Incorrect positioning
will prevent the phone from charging.
LED Indicator Status:
•
No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching for a
device. Device may not be compatible with the Qi®
standard.
•
Blue Light: Device is detected and is charging.
•
Red Light/Flashing: Internal error, or foreign object
is detected.
•
Green Light: Device has completed battery charging
(if device is equipped to transmit this information).
Important Notes Regarding This Vehicle’s Wireless
Charging Pad:
•
The presence of the Near-Field Communication
(NFC) function active on a smartphone could signal
malfunction anomalies.
•
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN or START posi-
tion in order for the phone to charge.
•
To avoid interference with the key fob search, the
wireless charging pad will stop charging when any
door or liftgate is opened, even if the engine is
running.
•
Be sure to place the mobile device correctly (display
facing upward, and phone not covering the LED) on
the wireless charging pad.
•
If the phone moves on the pad causing the red light
to illuminate, the phone will have to be picked up
and placed back on the charging pad to resume
charging.
•
Wireless charging is not as fast as when the phone
is connected to a wired charger.
•
The phone’s protective case must be removed when
placed on the wireless charging pad.
•
iPhone® 12 (including iPod®) is equipped with soft-
ware to protect the device from overheating. When
the software is active, the rate of charge is slowed
down to protect the device.
•
Phones must always be placed on the wireless
charging pad within the outline shown on the pad so
that its charging parts connect with the charging
coils of the system. Movement of the phone during
charging may prevent or slow the rate of charge.
•
Having multiple applications open on the phone
while charging will reduce the charging efficiency,
and may even shut down an application that is
actively running (i.e. Apple CarPlay®). This may also
cause the phone to overheat.
•
Wireless chargers may implement certain methods
to prevent the phone from overheating during charg-
ing such as slowing down the rate of charge. In cer-
tain instances, the device may shut down for a brief
period of time (when the device reaches a certain
temperature). If this happens, it does not mean
there is a fault with the wireless charging pad. This
may just be a protective measure to prevent dam-
age to the phone.
•
The use of multiple wireless functions at the same
time (wireless charging, Apply CarPlay®, Android
Auto™) could cause the device to overheat, resulting
in limitation of the functions or it turning off. In this
case, it is recommended to connect the system
using the USB port.
•
Do not place the key fob or any other type of metal/
magnetized object inside the mobile phone housing
or near the wireless charging pad.
•
With a compatible device placed on the charging
pad, and the ignition is cycled to the OFF position, a
reminder message may appear on the instrument
cluster display to warn the driver.
CAUTION!
The key fob should not be placed on the charging pad
or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it. Doing so can cause
excessive heat buildup and damage to the fob. Plac-
ing the fob in close proximity of the charging pad
blocks the fob from being detected by the vehicle and
prevents the vehicle from starting.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
2
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS
The window controls on the driver's door control all the
door windows.
The passenger door windows can also be operated by
using the single window controls on each passenger
door trim panel. The window controls will operate only
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
down briefly and release it when you want the window
to stop.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF posi-
tion. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
The timing is programmable within Uconnect Settings
page 133.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a loca-
tion accessible to children, and do not leave the igni-
tion of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
in the ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and front passenger door power window
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window
switch down briefly, then release, and the window will
go down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push the switch
briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up briefly and release; the win-
dow will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down or pull the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch
briefly and release it when you want the window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again
to close the window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the
auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure.
If this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold to close
the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the window path before closing.
RESET AUTO-UP
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window com-
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open the
window completely and continue to hold the switch
down for an additional two seconds after the win-
dow is fully open.
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout switch (the indica-
tor light on the switch will turn on). To enable the win-
dow controls, push and release the window lockout
switch again (the indicator light on the switch will
turn off).
Power Window Controls
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs
with the rear windows open, open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buf-
feting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE
— IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located between the
sun visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
•
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave
the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in
the ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
•
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
•
Do not use the sunroof and its related parts for
supporting and/or grabbing purposes. Serious per-
sonal injury may result to fingers and other body
parts as well as damage to the sunroof.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
SUNROOF
The sunroof has two programmed open positions, com-
fort stop position and full open position. The comfort
stop position has been optimized to minimize wind buf-
feting when driving with side windows closed and sun-
roof open. If the sunshade is in the closed position
when initiating a sunroof open or vent command the
sunshade will automatically open to the half open posi-
tion prior to the sunroof opening.
Express Open/Close
Push the switch to open and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open to the comfort stop
(partially opened) position and automatically stop. Push
the switch and release it again, and the sunroof will
open to the full open position then automatically stop.
Pull the switch to close and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will completely close automati-
cally from any position.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Window Lockout Switch Power Sunroof Switches
1 — Power Shade Switch
2 — Front Panel Open/Close Switch
3 — Front Panel Vent Switch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
2
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the switch to open. The sunroof will open
to the comfort stop (partially opened) position and auto-
matically stop. Push the switch and hold it again, and
the sunroof will open to the full open position then
automatically stop.
Pull and hold the switch to completely close the sunroof
from any position.
Any release of the switch during open or close opera-
tion will stop the sunroof movement. The sunroof will
remain in a partially opened position until the switch is
operated and held again.
VENTING SUNROOF
Push and release the vent switch within one-half sec-
ond and the sunroof will move from the closed position
to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent.” Dur-
ing Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch
will stop the sunroof.
NOTE:
When the sunroof is in a full open or a partial open
position, Express Vent operation is not available. You
must push and hold the vent switch to cycle the sunroof
from a slide open position to the vent position. Sunroof
movement will stop if the switch is released prior to the
sunroof reaching the vent position.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
POWER SUNSHADE
The sunshade has two programmed open positions:
half open and full open. When opening the sunshade
from the closed position, the sunshade will always stop
at the half open position regardless of express or
manual operation. The switch must be pushed again to
continue on to full open position.
Express Open/Close
Push the sunshade switch to open and release it within
one-half second and the sunshade will open to the half
open position and stop automatically. Push the switch
and release it again, and the sunshade will open to the
full open position and stop automatically.
Pull the sunshade switch to close and release it within
one-half second. If the sunroof is in closed position, the
sunshade will full close automatically from any position.
If the sunroof is open or vented, the sunshade cannot
be closed beyond the half open position. Pulling the
sunshade switch when the sunshade is in the half open
position will automatically close sunroof prior to the
sunshade closing.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
movement of the sunshade switch will stop the shade.
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the sunshade switch to open. The sun-
shade will open to the half open position and stop auto-
matically. Push and hold the switch again, and the sun-
shade will open to the full open position.
Pull and hold the sunshade switch to close. If the sun-
roof is in closed position, the sunshade will fully close
from any position. If the sunroof is open or vented, the
sunshade will close to the half open position and stop.
Pulling and holding the switch again will close both the
sunroof and sunshade completely.
Any release of the switch will stop the movement and
the sunshade will remain in a partially opened position
until the switch is pushed again.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an
obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, pull the sunroof close switch
and release to Express Close.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and
the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and clear
out any debris that may have collected in the tracks.
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located underneath the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Location (Underneath Instrument Panel)
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle. The safety latch
release lever is located behind the front edge of the
hood at the center. Reach in at the center of the
hood with a palm facing the ground. Once contact is
made with the safety latch release lever, push it
toward the passenger side of the vehicle to fully
release the hood.
NOTE:
•
Vehicle must be at a stop and the gear selector
must be in PARK.
•
While lifting the hood, use both hands.
•
Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms
are not in motion and not in the lifted position.
CLOSING THE HOOD
Hoods equipped with gas props are closed from the
point where the props no longer hold the hood open.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood
is fully closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle
unless hood is fully closed, with both latches
engaged.
LIFTGATE
UNLOCK/OPEN THE LIFTGATE
The liftgate may be released in one of several ways:
•
Key fob (if equipped with power liftgate)
•
Outside handle
•
Button on overhead console (if equipped with power
liftgate)
•
Hands-Free Liftgate (if equipped)
The overhead console switch and key fob (if equipped)
will release the liftgate when the liftgate is unlocked or
locked. The outside handle requires the liftgate to be
unlocked.
To Unlock The Liftgate
Use the key fob or the interior door unlock button on
the door panel to unlock the liftgate. The manual door
locks on the doors will not unlock the liftgate.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passen-
gers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the lift-
gate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
LOCK/CLOSE THE LIFTGATE
To manually close the liftgate, grab the liftgate closing
handle and pull in a downward motion to close the
liftgate.
Hood Safety Latch Release Lever Location
Liftgate Entry
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
NOTE:
Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in posses-
sion of the key fob because the liftgate may be locked.
To Lock The Liftgate
Use the key fob or the interior door lock button on the
door panel to lock the liftgate. The manual door locks
on the doors will not lock the liftgate.
POWER LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
The power liftgate may be opened by push-
ing the liftgate button on the key fob. Push
the liftgate button on the key fob twice within
five seconds to open or close the power lift-
gate. You can also open the liftgate by pushing the elec-
tronic liftgate release handle
page 21.
Using any of the following ways:
•
When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate will
open.
•
When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will close.
•
When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will reverse.
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by
pushing the liftgate button located on the front over-
head console. If the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate
can be closed by pushing the liftgate button located on
the left rear trim panel. If the liftgate is in motion, push-
ing the button again will reverse the liftgate.
When the liftgate button on the key fob is pushed two
times, the turn signals will flash twice to signal that the
liftgate is opening or closing, and an audible chime can
be heard (if enabled in the Uconnect Settings
page 133).
The key fob and the overhead console switch will open
the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The outside
handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked. If the
vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, and a valid Pas-
sive Entry key fob is within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate,
pulling the outside handle will unlock and open the
liftgate.
NOTE:
•
Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in pos-
session of the key fob because the liftgate may be
locked.
•
Use the interior door lock/unlock button on the door
panel or the key fob to lock and unlock the liftgate.
The manual door locks on the doors and the exterior
door lock cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate.
•
The liftgate will either unlock along with the vehicle
doors, or it will need to be unlocked by pushing the
electronic liftgate release, depending on the
selected setting in the Uconnect system
page 133.
•
The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
•
The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures above
150°F (65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of
snow or ice from the liftgate before pushing any of
the power liftgate switches.
•
If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position. After multiple
obstructions in the same cycle, the liftgate will auto-
matically stop and must be opened or closed
manually.
•
There are pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
•
The power liftgate must be in the full open position
in order for the rear liftgate close button, on the left
rear trim near the liftgate opening, to operate. If the
liftgate is not fully open, push the liftgate button on
the key fob to fully open the liftgate and then push it
again to close.
•
If the electronic liftgate release handle is pushed a
second time while the power liftgate is opening, the
liftgate motor will disengage to allow manual
operation.
•
If your liftgate is power closing and you put the
vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power
close. However, vehicle movement may result in the
detection of an obstruction.
•
Allow the power system to open the liftgate. Manu-
ally pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the
liftgate obstacle detection feature and stop the
power operation or reverse its direction.
Liftgate Pull Handle/Closing Liftgate
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
•
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
•
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path
is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and
latched before driving away.
•
Personal injury or cargo damage may occur if
caught in the path of the liftgate. Make sure the
liftgate path is clear before activating the liftgate.
HANDS-FREE LIFTGATE —
IF EQUIPPED
To open or close the liftgate using hands-free activa-
tion, use a straight in and out kicking motion under the
vehicle activation zone in the general location below
the rear license plate. The activation zone is about
1.8ft(0.5m)fromsidetoside.Donotmoveyourfoot
sideways or in a sweeping motion or the sensors may
not detect the motion.
NOTE:
Activation zone is the same for vehicles equipped with
or without a trailer tow package.
When a valid kicking motion is completed, the liftgate
will chime, the hazard lights will flash and the liftgate
will open after approximately one second, or close after
approximately three seconds. These settings can be
enabled or disabled through Uconnect Settings
page 133.
NOTE:
•
Opening or closing the Hands-Free Liftgate requires
a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the door handle. If a valid Passive Entry key fob is
not within 5 ft (1.5 m), the liftgate will not respond
to any kicks.
•
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be turned on or
off through the Uconnect system
page 133.
•
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature should be turned
off during jacking, tire changing, manual car wash,
and vehicle service.
•
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature can be activated by
any metallic object making a similar in-and-out
motion under the rear fascia/bumper, such as
cleaning using a metal broom.
•
The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate when the
transmission is in PARK.
•
If anything obstructs the Hands-Free Liftgate while it
is opening or closing, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed/open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
•
There are pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along
these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the
open position.
•
If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstruc-
tions within the same cycle, the system will auto-
matically stop. If this occurs, the liftgate must be
operated manually.
•
The power liftgate will release, but not power open,
in temperatures below −12°F (−24°C). Be sure to
remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate
before opening the liftgate.
•
If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of
time (approximately one hour), the liftgate may need
to be closed manually to reset power liftgate
functionality.
WARNING!
•
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
•
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
•
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path
is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and
latched before driving away.
(Continued)
Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
WARNING!
•
Personal injury or cargo damage may occur if
caught in the path of the liftgate. Make sure the
liftgate path is clear before activating the liftgate.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tem-
perature, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
NOTE:
Allow the power system to open the liftgate. Manually
pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the liftgate
obstacle detection feature and stop the power opera-
tion or reverse its direction.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Load Floor
The cargo load floor system has a load capacity of
300 lb (136 kg).
Cargo Load Floor Positions
The cargo load floor can be adjusted to three different
levels to create more space in the cargo area. These
positions are: upper, center, and lower.
NOTE:
The lower position is not available in vehicles equipped
with either a compact spare tire, or a full size spare tire.
The center position is not available in vehicles equipped
with a full size spare tire.
To change the level of the load floor, pull upward on the
load floor handle, pull the floor outward, and place the
back of the floor into the desired position. Lower the
front of the floor into place.
Raising The Load Floor
To raise the load floor for access to the Tire Service Kit,
or spare tire (if equipped), pull upward on the load floor
handle.
Do not raise the floor beyond the point of resistance. In
vehicles equipped with a power liftgate, forcing the floor
upward can damage the floor and vehicle’s trim panel.
To fully raise the load floor, pull upward on the floor
handle, pull the floor outward, then position the floor
upright with the bottom fitting on top of the floor posi-
tioning brackets. Push the top of the floor down firmly
to secure it in this position.
Cargo Load Floor Positions
1 — Upper Position
2 — Center Position
3 — Lower Position
Raised Load Floor — (Power Liftgate)
1 — Raised Floor Maximum Height
2 — Raised Load Floor
Fully Raised Load Floor Position
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can
be folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and
still maintains some rear seating room
page 25.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops
The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor should be
used to secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving.
Cargo tie-down loops are located on the trim panels.
WARNING!
•
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child
seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a
tie-down could pull loose and allow the child seat
to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
•
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying pur-
poses only, not for passengers, who should sit in
seats and use seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle han-
dling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
•
Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
•
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
•
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the
rear axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
vehicle to sway.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become
a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
Rear Storage Bins
The rear storage bins are located in the rear of the
vehicle on the sides of the load floor.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a lug-
gage rack, must not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and it
should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is
placed on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to
be sure that the load remains securely attached.
NOTE:
Crossbars can be purchased at your authorized dealer
through Mopar® parts.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on
the luggage rack, does not exceed the maximum
vehicle load capacity.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
Rear Storage Bin
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
2
CAUTION!
•
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity.
Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible
and secure the load appropriately.
•
Long loads, which extend over the windshield,
should be secured to both the front and rear of the
vehicle.
•
Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
•
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care-
fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift. It is rec-
ommended to not carry large flat loads, such as
wood panels or surfboards, which may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
•
Load should always be secured to crossbars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supple-
mentary tie down points only. Do not use ratchet-
ing mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the
straps frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
61
3
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Scan me
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
○
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
○
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display
page 65.
3. Speedometer
○
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Temperature Gauge
○
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal
range indicates that the engine cooling system
is operating satisfactorily.
○
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather or up
mountain grades. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating
range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or oth-
ers could be badly burned by steam or boiling cool-
ant. It is recommended to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats
page 219.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”,
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
5. Fuel Gauge
○
The gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel
tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN
position.
○
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel
door is located.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check when
the ignition is first cycled.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 63
3
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DESCRIPTIONS
1. Temperature Gauge
○
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal
range indicates that the engine cooling system
is operating satisfactorily.
○
The pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or oth-
ers could be badly burned by steam or boiling cool-
ant. It is recommended to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats
page 219.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”,
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
2. Tachometer
○
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
3. Speedometer
○
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
○
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel
tank when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in
the ON/RUN position.
○
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel
door is located.
NOTE:
The Instrument Cluster Warning Indicators will illumi-
nate briefly for a bulb check when the ignition is first
cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument clus-
ter display, which offers useful information to the driver.
With the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instru-
ment cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and features.
Using the driver interactive display located on the
instrument panel, your instrument cluster display can
show you how systems are working and give you warn-
ings when they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted con-
trols allow you to scroll through and enter the main
menus and submenus. You can access the specific
information you want and make selections and
adjustments.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
LOCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display features a driver interac-
tive display that is located in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
Depending on your vehicle trim, your instrument cluster
display may vary.
Instrument Cluster Display Location and Controls
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 65
3
The systems allow the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
•
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up
arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and submenus.
•
OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the informa-
tion screens or submenu screens of a main menu
item. Push and hold the OK button for one second
to reset displayed/selected features that can be
reset.
•
Menu Button — If Equipped
Push the Menu button to access/select the informa-
tion screens or submenu screens of the Home
Screen display. Push and hold the OK button to
enter edit mode.
•
Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left
arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
•
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down
arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
submenus.
•
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right
arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu screens
of a main menu item.
Display Options — If Equipped
Holding OK will also allow you to change your display to
Digital or Analog.
•
Digital theme will be the default theme
•
Menu screen times out after 10 seconds. Press OK
to reactivate
•
Speedometer must always be present
•
Relevant warning notifications and other pop-up info
will still be displayed in the main screen area (In this
case the speed moves to the top)
Custom Tile Configuration
To customize the instrument cluster further, you are
able to select up to five tiles to display information
based on your needs.
•
Press the MENU button for the Home Screen display
•
Navigate Left or Right to highlight desired tile
•
Press OK to select the tile and navigate to the
selected submenu and press OK again to add your
selection to your tile view
•
If equipped, the main menu options of the home
screen are Navigation, Vehicle Info, Driver Info,
Audio, and Off Road
Premium Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
1 — Up Arrow Button
2 — OK Button
3 — Menu Button
4 — Left Arrow Button
5 — Down Arrow Button
6 — Right Arrow Button
Menu Button
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You can customize your Instrument Cluster Display with
up to five tiles that may consist of the following:
NOTE:
These options may vary based on your vehicle trim
level.
Home Screen Options
•
Navigation — If Equipped
○ Route Set / Route Not Set
○ TripA/TripB
•
Vehicle Info
○ Coolant Temp
○ Trans Temp
○ Oil Temp
○ Oil Pressure
○ Battery Voltage
○ Oil Life
○ Tire Pressure
○ Fuel Economy
•
Driver Info — If Equipped
○ Posted Speed Limit Sign
○ Driver Assist
•
Audio
○ Audio Info
•
Off Road — If Equipped
○ Selec-Terrain / Air Suspension Status
○ Steering Angle
○ Pitch
○ Roll
The instrument cluster display is located in the center
portion of the cluster and consist of multiple sections:
•
Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will illu-
minate in gray under normal conditions, yellow for
noncritical warnings, red for critical warnings, and
white for on demand information.
•
Submenu Dots — Whenever there are submenus
available, the position within the submenus is
shown here.
•
Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
•
Gear Selector Status (PRND)
•
Driver Interactive Display (Compass, Temp, Range to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel Economy, Current
Fuel Economy and Time)
•
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) Status — If Equipped
OIL CHANGE RESET
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
•
Your vehicle is equipped with an
engine oil change indicator system.
The “Oil Change Due” message will
display in the instrument cluster dis-
play for five seconds after a single chime has
sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change
interval. The engine oil change indicator system is
duty cycle based, which means the engine oil
change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your
personal driving style.
•
Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position.
To reset the oil change indicator after performing the
scheduled maintenance, refer to the following
procedure:
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
3. Cycle the ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
Custom Tile Screen
Scan me
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 67
3
DISPLAY AND MESSAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Includes the following, but not limited to:
Front Seat Belts Unbuckled Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled
Traction Control Off Washer Fluid Low Oil Pressure Low
Oil Change Due Fuel Low Service Anti-lock Brake System
Service Electronic Throttle Control Service Power Steering Cruise Off
Cruise Ready ACC Override Cruise Set To XXX mph or km/h
Service Shifter Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) Service Tire Pressure System
Park Brake Engaged Brake Fluid Low Engine Temperature Hot
Lights On Right Front Turn Signal Light Out Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
Left Front Turn Signal Light Out Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out Ignition or Accessory On
Vehicle Not In Park Remote Start Active Push Start Button Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low
Remote Start Canceled Door Open Remote Start Canceled Hood Open Remote Start Canceled Liftgate Open
Remote Start Canceled Time Expired Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset Service Air Bag System
Service Air Bag Warning Light Door(s) Open Service Transmission
Liftgate Open Hood Open Shift Not Allowed
Vehicle Speed Too High To Shift to D Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to R Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white or yellow telltales area on the left, and the green
or red telltales area on the right.
The instrument cluster display will normally display the
main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the
main menu. The main display area also displays pop-up
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible
warning or information messages. These pop-up mes-
sages fall into several categories:
•
Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous
screen. Most of the messages of this type are then
stored (as long as the condition that activated it
remains active) and can be reviewed from the “Mes-
sages” main menu item. Examples of this message
type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out” and
“Low Tire Pressure.”
•
Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until
the condition that activated the message is cleared.
Examples of this message type are “Turn Signal On”
(if a turn signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver
leaves the vehicle with the lights on).
•
Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote
Start feature. This message type is displayed until
the ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this
message type are “Remote Start Canceled - Door
Ajar” and “Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to
Start.”
•
Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous
screen. An example of this message type is “Auto-
matic High Beams On.”
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
MENU ITEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to view the
main menu items for several features. Use the up
and down arrow buttons to scroll through the
driver interactive display menu options until the desired
menu is reached.
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items display in
the center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may
vary depending on your vehicle features.
Main Menu
DRIVER INFO — IF EQUIPPED
Base/Midline Cluster
Speedometer
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until the Speedometer Menu item is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK
button to change the speedometer scale from MPH
to km/h (or vice versa).
Premium Cluster
Speedometer
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until the Speedometer Menu item is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK
button to change the speedometer scale from MPH
to km/h (or vice versa).
Driver Assist
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until the Driver Assist menu icon is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK
button to select. The Driver Assist screen indicates the
current status of ACC, Active Lane Management and
Highway Assist/Assist+/Pilot. Push and release the OK
button to again to change between Zoomed In and
Zoomed Out view (“Press OK to Zoom In” will display
when in Zoomed Out view/“Press OK to Zoom Out” will
display when in Zoomed In view).
VEHICLE INFO (CUSTOMER INFORMATION
FEATURES)
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Vehicle Info Menu item is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the left
or right arrow button to cycle through the
Vehicle Info submenus and follow the prompts on each
screen as needed.
Base/Midline Cluster
1. Tire Pressure
○
If tire pressure is correct for all tires a vehicle
icon is displayed with tire pressure values in
each corner of the icon.
○
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate
Tire To XX” is displayed with the vehicle icon and
the tire pressure values in each corner of the
icon with the pressure value of the low tire dis-
played in a different color than the other tire
pressure value.
○
If the Tire Pressure system requires service,
“Service Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
○
Tire PSI is an information only function and can-
not be reset
page 162.
2. Coolant Temperature
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
3. Transmission Temperature — Automatic
Transmission Only
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
4. Oil Temperature
Displays the level of oil temperature.
5. Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage.
Premium Cluster
•
Fuel Economy page 70
○ Average Fuel Economy
○ Current Fuel Economy/Sailing Active Status Indi-
cation
page 80
○ Range To Empty
NOTE:
Significant changes in driving style or vehicle load-
ing will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the Range displayed value.
•
Gauge Summary
○ Coolant Temp
○ Trans Temp
○ Oil Temp
○ Oil Pressure
○ Battery Voltage
•
Tire Pressure
○ If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner
of the ICON.
○ If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate
Tire To XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON and
the tire pressure values in each corner of the
ICON with the pressure value of the low tire dis-
played in a different color than the other tire
pressure value.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 69
3
○ If the Tire Pressure system requires service,
“Service Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
○ Tire PSI is an information only function and
cannot be reset
page 162.
•
Stop/Start Status
○ Display the status of the Stop/Start system.
DRIVER ASSIST
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Driver Assist menu title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display.
The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC
system settings. The information displayed depends on
ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the follow-
ing displays in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Ready.”
Push and release the SET + or the SET- button (located
on the steering wheel) and the following will display in
the instrument cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the instru-
ment cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activ-
ity occurs, which may include any of the following:
•
Distance Setting Change
•
System Cancel
•
Driver Override
•
System Off
•
ACC Proximity Warning
•
ACC Unavailable Warning
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity
page 97.
The instrument cluster display displays the current
Active Lane Management system settings. The informa-
tion displayed depends on Active Lane Management
system status and the conditions that need to be met
page 118.
FUEL ECONOMY
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Fuel Economy menu title is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Push and hold the OK button
to reset average fuel economy feature.
•
Average Fuel Economy– The display shows the aver-
age fuel economy (MPG, or L/100 km, or km/L)
since the last reset.
•
Current Fuel Economy/Sailing Active Status Indica-
tion – This display shows the current fuel economy
(MPG, or L/100 km, or km/L) while driving as well
as indicating when the Idle Coasting feature if
enabled and active
page 80.
•
Range To Empty – The display shows the estimated
distance (mi or km) that can be traveled with the
fuel remaining in the tank. When the Range value is
less than 30 miles (48 km) estimated driving dis-
tance, the Range display will change to a “LOW
FUEL” message. Adding a significant amount of fuel
to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW FUEL” message
and a new Range value will display. Range cannot
be reset through the OK button.
NOTE:
Significant changes in driving style or vehicle load-
ing will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the Range displayed value.
TRIP INFO
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Trip menu title is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Toggle the left
or right arrow but-
ton to select Trip A or Trip B. The Trip information will
display the following:
•
Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) trav-
eled for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
•
Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel
economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of Trip A or
Trip B since the last reset.
•
Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of
travel since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
OFF ROAD — IF EQUIPPED
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until the Off Road Menu icon/title is highlighted. Push
the left
or right arrow button to scroll the
submenus.
Terrain Status
•
Selec-Terrain Status
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STOP/START – IF EQUIPPED
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Stop/Start menu title is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster display.
AUDIO
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Audio menu title is displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
STORED MESSAGES
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Messages Menu Icon is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. This feature shows the num-
ber of stored warning messages. Pushing the left
or
right
arrow button will allow you to scroll through the
stored messages.
SCREEN SETUP
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK
button to enter the submenus and follow the prompts
on the screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature
allows you to change what information is displayed in
the instrument cluster as well as the location that infor-
mation is displayed.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
NOTE:
Based on vehicle trim level and current status, some of
the following options may not be available.
Base/Midline Cluster
Upper Left or Upper Right
None Compass Outside Temp
Date Time Ignition State
(Keyless Ignition
Only)
Range To Empty Average
Economy
Current
Economy
Center
None Range to Empty Date
Average
Economy
Current
Economy
Outside Temp
Compass Menu Title Audio Info
Time Trip A Distance Speedometer
Trip B Distance
Restore Defaults
•
Ok
•
Cancel
Premium Cluster
Upper Left or Upper Right
None Range To Empty Date
Outside Temp Current
Economy
Ignition State
Time Compass Average
Economy
Trip A Trip B
Odometer- Premium Cluster Only
•
Show
•
Hide
Favorites
Driver Info Vehicle Info Trip
Off Road Audio Stored
Messages
Settings
Defaults
•
Restore
•
Cancel
VEHICLE SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Vehicle Setup Menu item is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. This menu item allows you to
change the settings for the following:
•
Display
○ Navigation Repetition
•
Security
○ Passenger Airbag
○ Seat Belt Reminder
•
Safety and Assistance
○ Hill Start Assist
NOTE:
Most vehicle settings will be moved into the radio if a
touchscreen radio is present
page 133.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 71
3
Display
By selecting Display, the following settings can be
selected:
•
Language: select the language in which to display
the information/warnings.
•
Phone Repetition: displays information relating to
the phone mode.
Units
By selecting Units, the unit of measurement to use for
displaying various values can be set. Possible options are:
•
US
•
Metric
•
Custom: allows individual changes of units for tem-
perature, distance, consumption, and tire pressure.
Clock And Date
By selecting Clock and Date, the time and date can be
set. Possible options are:
•
Set Time: adjust hours/minutes
•
Set Format: adjust the time format “12h” (12 hours)
or “24h” (24 hours)
•
Set Date: adjust day/month/year
Security
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD): a selection of Passen-
ger Air Bag Disable (ON/OFF) may be made if a child
restraint must be installed in the front seat.
Safety And Assistance
By selecting the item Safety and Assistance, the follow-
ing adjustments can be made:
•
ParkSense (If Equipped): a selection of the type of
information provided by ParkSense
•
Front ParkSense Volume (If Equipped): selection of
the volume of the beeps provided by the front
ParkSense
•
Rear ParkSense Volume (If Equipped): selection of
the volume of the beeps provided by the rear
ParkSense
•
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) (If Equipped): a
selection of operating modes of the system Forward
Collision Warning Plus
•
FCW Sensitivity (If Equipped): a selection of the
“readiness” of intervention of the Forward Collision
Warning Plus system, based on the distance to the
obstacle
•
Rain Sensing Wipers (If Equipped): enabling/
disabling the automatic operation of wipers in the
event of rain
•
Active Lane Management Force (If Equipped): selec-
tion of the force to be applied to the steering wheel
to put the car in the roadway through the system of
electrical drive, in case of operation of the system
Active Lane Management
•
Active Lane Management Warning (If Equipped): a
selection of the “readiness” of intervention of Active
Lane Management
•
Buzzer Volume: There are 4 options: Off, Low,
Medium, Loud
•
Brake Service (If Equipped): activation of the proce-
dure to carry out braking system maintenance
•
Auto Park Brake (If Equipped): enable/disable auto
insertion of the Electric Park Brake
•
Hill Start Assist: Activation/Deactivation of the Hill
Start Assist system
Lights — If Equipped
By selecting Lights, the following adjustments can be
made:
•
Ambient Lights (If Equipped): adjust the sensitivity
of lighting in the doors and overhead console
•
Lights Off Delay: set the delay for headlight shutoff
after engine shutoff
•
Headlight Sensitivity: adjust the sensitivity of head-
light brightness
•
Greeting Lights: activate the direction indicators
when unlocking the doors
•
Daytime Lights (If Equipped): activate/deactivate
the daytime running lights
•
Cornering Lights (If Equipped): activate/deactivate
the cornering lights
•
Auto High Beam (If Equipped): activate/deactivate
the automatic high beam headlights
Doors And Locks
By selecting Doors and Locks, the following adjust-
ments can be made:
•
Auto Unlock Doors: automatic unlocking of the
doors when exiting the vehicle
•
Lights with Lock: activate the direction indicators
when locking the doors
•
Horn With Remote Lock: activate/deactivate the
horn when pressing the lock button on the key. The
options are “Off”, “First Press”, and “Second Press”
•
Horn With Remote Start (If Equipped): activate/
deactivate the horn at the Remote Starting of the
engine with the key
•
Door Unlock: allow you to choose whether to unlock
all the doors or only the driver’s side door on the
first push of the unlock button on the key
•
Auto Driver Comfort (If Equipped): activate/
deactivate automatic climate control during vehicle
starts
•
Key in Memory (If Equipped): activate/deactivate
memory linked to a key
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass
By selecting Compass, the following settings can be
changed:
Calibration (If Equipped)
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic, and the cluster
will display dashes (- -) until the compass is calibrated.
You may also calibrate the compass by completing one
or more 360 degree turns (in an area free from large
metal or metallic objects) until the dashes (- -) displayed
in the instrument cluster display turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
Variance (If Equipped)
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone
where the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once
properly set, the compass will automatically compen-
sate for the differences and provide the most accurate
compass heading.
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY
SAVER MODE MESSAGE —
ELECTRICAL LOAD REDUCTION
ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sen-
sor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electri-
cal system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure,
or the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, elec-
trical load reduction actions will take place to extend
the driving time and distance of the vehicle. This is
done by reducing power to or turning off non-essential
electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is run-
ning. It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due
to lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the
current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge
at a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
•
The charging system is independent from load
reduction. The charging system performs a diagnos-
tic on the charging system continuously.
•
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indi-
cate a problem with the charging system
page 75.
The following are electrical loads that may be switched
off (if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
affected by load reduction:
•
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
•
Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
•
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
•
HVAC System
•
150W Power Inverter System
•
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of
the following conditions:
•
The charging system cannot deliver enough electri-
cal power to the vehicle system because the electri-
cal loads are larger than the capability of charging
system. The charging system is still functioning
properly.
•
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB
ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving,
towing, frequent stopping).
•
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter elec-
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and simi-
lar devices.
•
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
•
The vehicle was parked for an extended period of
time (weeks, months).
•
The battery was recently replaced and was not
charged completely.
•
The battery was discharged by an electrical load left
on when the vehicle was parked.
Compass Variance Map
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 73
3
•
The battery was used for an extended period with
the engine not running to supply radio, lights, char-
gers, +12 Volts portable appliances like vacuum
cleaners, game consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery
Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
•
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
○ Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
○ Check what may be plugged into power outlets
+12 Volts, 150W, USB ports
○ Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
○ Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
•
Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories,
audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if
any (load and Ignition Off Draw currents).
•
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
time and parking time).
•
The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips
and the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern
did not help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instru-
ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or
acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which
you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always
refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a
failure indication. All active telltales will display first if
applicable. The system check menu may appear differ-
ent based upon equipment options and current vehicle
status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault with the air bag, and will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a
fault with the air bag has been detected, it will stay on
until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not on dur-
ing startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that
there is a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark
on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible
brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem
with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until
the condition has been corrected. If the problem is
related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run
when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake
system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which
will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master
cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is danger-
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a colli-
sion. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault
is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction with the charging system. Con-
tact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Drowsiness Detected Warning Light —
If Equipped
Driver drowsiness detection helps to avoid
crashes caused by fatigue by advising driv-
ers to take a break in time. Once Drowsy
Driver is detected, A pop-up will display con-
tinuously until the driver presses the OK button to clear.
Once the pop-up message is cleared, it is stored until
the condition is no longer true.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the EPS system
page 93.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
problem with the ETC system. If a problem is
detected while the vehicle is running, the
light will either stay on or flash depending on
the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the
vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the trans-
mission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle running,
your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake ped-
als are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is run-
ning, immediate service is required and you may experi-
ence reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or
engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The
light will come on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn of
an overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too high, this
light will illuminate and a single chime will
sound.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is
on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL
(N) and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading
does not return to normal, turn the engine off immedi-
ately and call for service
page 205.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
hood is left open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 75
3
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on
while driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the
engine as soon as possible, and contact an
authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the
engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the
hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the engine oil temperature is high. If the light
turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and
shut off the engine as soon as possible. Wait
for oil temperature to return to normal levels.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver
or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When
the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN
position and if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on.
When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound
page 165.
Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with a mes-
sage in the instrument cluster display and a
buzzer) to indicate a transmission fault. Con-
tact an authorized dealer if the message
remains after restarting the engine.
Transmission Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a
high transmission fluid temperature. This
may occur with strenuous usage such as
trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the
vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with
the transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until the light
turns off. Once the light turns off, you may continue to
drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact
with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a
fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds when the Vehicle Secu-
rity system is arming, and then will flash
slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The
light will turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required as soon as possible.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is
not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position, have the brake system
inspected by an authorized dealer.
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the Electric Park Brake is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer.
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the ESC
system is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position,
and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the
engine running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction
has been detected in the ESC system. If this warning
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
•
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator
Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
•
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN,
the ESC system will be on, even if it was
turned off previously.
Fuel Cutoff Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate after an
accident has occurred, and the system has
shut the fuel off.
Fuel Level Sensor Failure Warning Light
This light illuminates when there is a fuel
level sensor failure. If this light illuminates,
take it to an authorized dealer and have
them inspect it.
Active Lane Management Warning Light
— If Equipped
The Active Lane Management Warning Light
will be solid yellow when the vehicle is
approaching a lane marker. The warning
light will flash when the vehicle is crossing
the lane marker.
Service Active Lane Management
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Active Lane Management system is not oper-
ating and requires service. Please see an
authorized dealer.
Low Coolant Level Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the
vehicle coolant level is low
page 219.
Low Fuel Warning Light
Depending on whether the tank size is
13.5 gal (51 L) or 15.8 gal (60 L), the Low
Fuel Indicator Light will turn on when the fuel
level goes below 1.5 gal (5.6 L) or 1.7 gal
(6.6 L) respectively.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
(MIL) Warning Light
The MIL is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine
and automatic transmission control systems.
This warning light will illuminate when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the bulb does not come on when turning the ignition
switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition
checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several typical driving styles. In most
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The
vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible if this occurs.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 77
3
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating conditions.
This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over
flammable substances such as dry plants, wood,
cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious
injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control
system. It also could affect fuel economy and drive-
ability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when ACC is not operat-
ing and needs service
page 97.
Service 4WD Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a
fault with the 4WD system. If the light stays
on or comes on during driving, it means that
the 4WD system is not functioning properly
and that service is required. We recommend you drive
to the nearest service center and have the vehicle ser-
viced immediately.
Service Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault in the Forward Collision Warning Sys-
tem. Contact an authorized dealer for ser-
vice
page 160.
Service Stop/Start System Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start system is not functioning properly
and service is required. Contact an autho-
rized dealer for service.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light — If Equipped
The warning light switches on and a mes-
sage is displayed to indicate that the tire
pressure is lower than the recommended
value and/or that slow pressure loss is
occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel
consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
previously, the display will show the indications corre-
sponding to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the proper tire infla-
tion pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pres-
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is signifi-
cantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire fail-
ure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS mal-
function indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
tion exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumi-
nated, the system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is rec-
ommended that you take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light
— If Equipped
This light illuminates when there is a failure
with the tow hook. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the 4WD Low mode. The front and rear
driveshafts are mechanically locked together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the
wheels
page 92.
4WD Lock Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the 4WD Lock mode. The front and rear
driveshafts are mechanically locked
together, forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed
page 92.
Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator Light —
If Equipped
The Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator light will illu-
minate if a fault is detected, it will be indi-
cated by a yellow HOLD! indicator light that
will stay on as long as the fault condition
exists.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to warn you of a pos-
sible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that Forward Collision Warning is off.
Immobilizer Fail/VPS Electrical Alarm
Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the Vehicle
Security system has detected an attempt to
break into the vehicle.
NOTE:
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Warning Light could illuminate if a
problem with the system is detected. This condition will
result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
No Target Detected Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive
Cruise Control is set and there is no vehicle
in front detected
page 97.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 79
3
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Detected Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive
Cruise Control is SET and a vehicle in front is
detected
page 97.
Auto HOLD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Auto HOLD keeps your vehicle at a complete
stop without you having to keep your foot on
the brake pedal. Once engaged a green
HOLD indicator will appear in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Automatic High Beam Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator shows that the automatic high
beam headlights are on
page 37.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Cruise Control is set to the desired speed
page 95.
Active Lane Management Indicator Light
— If Equipped
The Active Lane Management indicator light
illuminates solid green when both lane mark-
ings have been detected and the system is
“armed” and ready to provide visual and
torque warnings if an unintentional lane departure
occurs.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on
page 37.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
parking lights or headlights are turned on.
Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport mode is
active.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated,
the turn signal indicator will flash indepen-
dently and the corresponding exterior turn
signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be
activated when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE:
•
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn
signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the Cruise Con-
trol has been turned on, but not set
page 95.
Idle Coasting Indicator Light
The Idle Coasting/Sail feature works by
allowing engine speeds to drop to idle, sav-
ing fuel. The indicator is only seen when Idle
Coasting is chosen and active. In addition,
there is indication when this feature is active on the
Fuel Economy menu screen on your Instrument Cluster
Display.
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator shows when the HDC feature
is turned on. The light will be on solid when
HDC is armed. HDC can only be armed when
the transfer case is in the 4WD Low position
and the vehicle speed is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). If
these conditions are not met while attempting to use
the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will flash
on/off.
Active Lane Management Indicator Light
— If Equipped
When the Active Lane Management system
is ON, but not armed, the Active Lane Man-
agement indicator light illuminates solid
white. This occurs when only left, right, or
neither lane line has been detected. If a single lane line
is detected, the system is ready to provide only visual
warnings if an unintentional lane departure occurs on
the detected lane line
page 118.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on. With
the low beams activated, push the multifunc-
tion lever forward (toward the front of the
vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunc-
tion lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull
the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on,
“flash to pass” scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and auto-
matic transmission control systems. When these sys-
tems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide
excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as
emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II sys-
tem will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information
to assist your service technician in making repairs.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause fur-
ther damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a connec-
tion port to allow access to information related to the
performance of your emissions controls. Authorized
service technicians may need to access this informa-
tion to assist with the diagnosis and service of your
vehicle and emissions system
page 133.
WARNING!
•
ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
•
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
○ Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
○ Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including per-
sonal information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 81
3
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control sys-
tem. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is function-
ing and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be deter-
mined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail
the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things
will happen:
○
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until you
turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not
ready and you should not proceed to the I/M
station.
○
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you
can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replace-
ment, you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the previously men-
tioned test routine may then indicate that the system is
now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust
both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat
belts.
WARNING!
•
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or oth-
ers could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Key-
less Enter ’n Go™ in the ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL
or PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
NORMAL STARTING
Place the ignition switch in the START position and
release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to
start within 10 seconds, place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Tip Start Feature
Place the ignition switch in the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter
motor will continue to run, and will automatically disen-
gage itself when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, place the ignition switch in the OFF posi-
tion, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the
brakes before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
•
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Keyless Enter ’n Go™ Functions — Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to
start, the starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the ENGINE START/STOP
button again.
Keyless Enter ’n Go™ — With Driver’s Foot Off The
Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position)
The Keyless Enter ’n Go™ feature operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ON/RUN,
and START. To change the ignition switch positions with-
out starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow,
these steps starting with the ignition switch in the OFF
position:
1. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition switch to the OFF position.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
(BELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use
of an externally powered electric engine block heater
(available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
83
4
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has
not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the bat-
tery to ensure a full battery charge during the crank
cycle.
2. Place the ignition in the START position and release
it when the engine starts. For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
ignition systems, press and hold the brake pedal
while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, place
the ignition in the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 sec-
onds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
“Extended Park Starting” procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then
repeat the procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank con-
tinuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait
10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
AFTER STARTING — WARMING UP
THE ENGINE
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure, and has not experienced
an Extended Park condition as identified in “Extended
Park Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it
there. Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds.
This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is
flooded. Leave the ignition key in the ON/RUN position,
release the accelerator pedal and repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
•
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the con-
verter and vehicle.
•
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improp-
erly
page 203.
STOPPING THE ENGINE
Vehicles Equipped With Electronic Key
(Keyless Enter ’n Go™):
To shut off the engine with vehicle speed greater than
5 mph (8 km/h), you must push and hold the ignition or
push the ENGINE START/STOP button three times con-
secutively within a few seconds. The engine will shut
down, and the ignition will be placed in the ON/RUN
position.
Turning off the car (placing the ignition from the
ON/RUN position to the OFF position), the power supply
to the accessories are maintained for a period of three
minutes.
Opening the driver’s side door with the ignition in
ON/RUN will sound a short chime that reminds the
driver to place the ignition to OFF.
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the window
switches remain active for three minutes. Opening a
front door will cancel this function.
After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the tem-
perature inside the engine compartment to cool before
shutting off the engine.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
84 STARTING AND OPERATING
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
For the recommended viscosity and quality grades
page 254.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in
the engine or damage may result.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should
be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem.
PARK BRAKE
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB system that offers
simple operation, and some additional features that
make the parking brake more convenient and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
You can engage the parking brake in two ways:
•
Manually, by applying the EPB switch.
•
Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake fea-
ture in the Customer Programmable Features sec-
tion of the Uconnect settings
page 133.
The EPB switch is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on the switch
momentarily. You may hear a sound from the back of the
vehicle while the parking brake engages. Once the parking
brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE Warning Light in the
instrument cluster and an indicator on the switch will illu-
minate. If your foot is on the brake pedal while you apply
the parking brake, you may notice a small amount of
brake pedal movement. The parking brake can be applied
even when the ignition switch is OFF. The Brake Warning
Light will not illuminate and can only be released when
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The EPB Warning Light will illuminate if the EPB switch
is held for longer than 60 seconds in either the
released or applied position. The light will extinguish
upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking
brake will automatically engage whenever the transmis-
sion is placed into PARK. If your foot is on the brake
pedal, you may notice a small amount of brake pedal
movement while the parking brake is engaging.
The parking brake will release automatically when the
ignition switch is ON/RUN, the transmission is in DRIVE
or REVERSE, the driver’s seat belt is buckled, and an
attempt is made to drive away.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Put your foot
on the brake pedal, then push the EPB switch down
momentarily. You may hear a sound from the back of
the car while the parking brake disengages. You may
also notice a small amount of movement in the brake
pedal. Once the parking brake is fully disengaged, the
BRAKE Warning Light in the instrument cluster and the
LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, other-
wise the load on the transmission locking mechanism
may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of
PARK. The parking brake should always be applied
whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Do not rely on the parking brake to operate effec-
tively if the rear brakes have been immersed in
waterormud.
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement
and possible injury or damage.
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
Electric Park Brake Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 85
4
WARNING!
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num-
ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Key-
less Enter ’n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunc-
tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary
to engage the parking brake while the vehicle is in
motion, maintain upward pressure on the EPB switch
for as long as engagement is desired. The BRAKE
Warning Light will illuminate, and a continuous chime
will sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated
automatically while the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is in
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a
complete stop using the parking brake, when the
vehicle reaches approximately 3 mph, (5 km/h) the
parking brake will remain engaged.
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or
repeated use of the parking brake to slow the vehicle,
may cause serious damage to the brake system. Be
sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driv-
ing; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a
collision.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB sys-
tem, a yellow EPB Warning Light will illuminate. This
may be accompanied by the BRAKE Warning Light
flashing. In this event, urgent service of the EPB system
is required. Do not rely on the parking brake to hold the
vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The EPB can be programmed to be applied automati-
cally whenever the vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph
(3 km/h) and the transmission is placed in PARK. Auto
Park Brake is enabled and disabled by customer selec-
tion through the Customer Programmable Features sec-
tion of the Uconnect Settings
page 133.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be bypassed
by pushing the EPB switch to the release position while
the transmission is placed in PARK and the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that will
engage the parking brake automatically if the vehicle is
left unsecured while the ignition switch is in ON/RUN.
For automatic transmissions, the EPB will automatically
engage if all of the following conditions are met:
•
Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
•
There is no attempt to press the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal.
•
The seat belt is unbuckled.
•
The driver’s door is open.
•
The vehicle is not in the PARK position.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the
EPB switch while the driver’s door is open and the
brake pedal is pressed. Once manually bypassed, Safe-
Hold will be enabled again once the vehicle reaches
12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is turned to the OFF
position and back to ON/RUN again.
Auto Hold — If Equipped
Auto Hold is a comfort feature that allows the driver to
remove their foot from the brake pedal once the vehicle
has come to a stop. The vehicle must be held at a
standstill for a predetermined amount of time by
hydraulic braking. The EPB will then engage and con-
tinue to hold the vehicle at a stop until the driver
applies the accelerator pedal. Auto Hold can be acti-
vated or deactivated by pushing the HOLD button
located on the switch bank.
86 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following conditions must be met for Auto Hold to
activate:
•
Driver’s door is closed
•
Driver's seat belt is fastened
•
Vehicle is at a standstill
•
Forward gear is selected
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is not engaged
•
EPB is not applied
•
ParkSense Active Park Assist System auto parking
maneuver is not activated
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by an
authorized dealer.
You should only make repairs for which you have the
knowledge and the right equipment. You should only
enter Brake Service Mode during brake service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary
for you or your technician to push the rear piston into
the rear caliper bore. With the EPB system, this can
only be done after retracting the EPB actuator.
The actuator retraction can be done easily by entering
the Brake Service Mode through the Uconnect Settings
in your vehicle. This menu-based system will guide you
through the steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator
in order to perform rear brake service.
Service Mode has requirements that must be met in
order to be activated:
•
The vehicle must be at a standstill.
•
The parking brake must be disabled.
•
The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
•
The EPB switch not activated.
•
The vehicle in ignition ON/RUN position.
•
The brake pedal not pressed.
While in Service Mode, the EPB Warning Light will flash
continuously while the ignition switch is ON/RUN.
NOTE:
A dedicated message will appear in the instrument
cluster display if Brake Service Mode cannot be
activated.
When brake service work is complete, the following
steps must be followed to reset the parking brake sys-
tem to normal operation:
•
Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
•
Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
•
Apply the EPB Switch.
NOTE:
A dedicated message will appear in the instrument
cluster display if Brake Service Mode cannot be
deactivated.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting
out of PARK.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK (P) position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
•
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK
before exiting the vehicle.
•
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL (N)
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
•
The vehicle may not engage a newly selected gear
when shifting between PARK, REVERSE (R), or
DRIVE (D) if the vehicle is moving while shifting.
(Continued)
Auto Hold Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 87
4
WARNING!
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
•
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num-
ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
•
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK (P)
before the ignition can be turned to the OFF position.
This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the
vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK. This
system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever
the ignition is in the OFF position.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
INTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK (P) unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of
PARK, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position
(whether the engine is running or not), and the brake
pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also be
pressed to shift from NEUTRAL (N) into DRIVE (D) or
REVERSE (R) when the vehicle is stopped or moving at
low speeds.
8-SPEED AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster.
To select a gear range, push the lock button on the gear
selector and move the selector rearward or forward. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmis-
sion out of PARK (P) (or NEUTRAL (N), when the vehicle
is stopped or moving at low speeds). Select the DRIVE
(D) range for normal driving.
NOTE:
•
The transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition,
and precision shifts will develop within a few hun-
dred miles (kilometers).
•
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selec-
tor position and the actual transmission gear (for
example, driver selects REVERSE (R) while driving
forward), the position indicator will blink continu-
ously until the selector is returned to the proper
position, or the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts its
shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with envi-
ronmental and road conditions.
The 8-speed transmission has been developed to meet
the needs of current and future FWD/AWD vehicles.
Software and calibration is refined to optimize the cus-
tomer’s driving experience and fuel economy. By
design, some vehicle and driveline combinations utilize
NINTH gear only in very specific driving situations and
conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal
when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-) shift
positions. Manual shifts can be made using the
AutoStick shift control
page 90. Moving the gear
selector into the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position) activates AutoStick mode, providing
88 STARTING AND OPERATING
manual shift control and displaying the current gear in
the instrument cluster (as 1, 2, 3, etc.). Toggling the
gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the
AutoStick position will manually select the transmission
gear.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward)
it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission
gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Move the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D]
position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting out of
PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking
the transmission. The engine can be started in this
range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
NOTE:
Block the wheels with a wedge or a stone if the vehicle
is parked on a steep slope.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK (P) position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
•
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK
before exiting the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL (N)
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
•
The vehicle may not engage a newly selected gear
when shifting between PARK, REVERSE (R), or
DRIVE (D) if the vehicle is moving while shifting.
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
•
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num-
ber of reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
(Continued)
Gear Selector
STARTING AND OPERATING 89
4
WARNING!
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
Before moving the transmission gear selector out
of PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
position, and also press the brake pedal. Other-
wise, damage to the gear selector could result.
•
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have properly engaged the transmission into the
PARK position:
•
When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on
the gear selector, and firmly move the selector all
the way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
•
Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
•
With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for pro-
longed periods with the engine running. The engine
may be started in this range. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the igni-
tion to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing
page 129.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle
page 207.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift
control to select a lower gear
page 90. Under these
conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat build-up.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat-
ing limits, the transmission controller may modify the
transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque,
and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch
engagement. This is done to prevent transmission dam-
age due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate, and
the transmission may operate differently until the trans-
mission cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and/or transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature
improves warm-up time of the engine and transmission
to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the
torque converter clutch is inhibited until the engine
and/or transmission is warm. Normal operation will
resume once the temperature(s) have risen to a suit-
able level.
AUTOSTICK
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This feature
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
90 STARTING AND OPERATING
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position
(beside the DRIVE (D) position), it can be moved for-
ward and rearward. This allows the driver to manually
select the transmission gear being used. Moving the
gear selector forward (-) triggers a downshift and rear-
ward (+) an upshift. The current gear is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or
down when the driver moves the gear selector rearward
(+) or forward (-), unless an engine lugging or overspeed
condition would result. It will remain in the selected
gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen,
except as follows:
•
8-speed transmissions will automatically upshift
when necessary to prevent engine overspeed.
•
The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
•
The transmission will automatically downshift to
FIRST gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the
driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission
as the vehicle is accelerated.
•
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or SECOND
gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in
SECOND gear. Starting out in SECOND gear can be
helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
•
If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
overspeed, that shift will not occur.
•
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
•
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
•
The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
NOTE:
When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is enabled,
AutoStick is not active.
To disengage AutoStick, return the gear selector to the
DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick
position at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
TRANSMISSION LIMP HOME MODE
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that
could result in transmission damage, Transmission
Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the trans-
mission may operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain
in NEUTRAL (N). The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode may allow the
vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service
without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing
the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if possible. If
not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition until the engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is
no longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend
that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest pos-
sible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmis-
sion. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or dur-
ing some accelerations, the clutch automatically
disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage until the
engine and/or transmission is warm (usually after 1 to
3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine
speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not
engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shift-
ing properly when the vehicle is cold. This is normal.
The torque converter clutch will function normally once
the powertrain is sufficiently warm.
STARTING AND OPERATING 91
4
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
IF EQUIPPED
JEEP® ACTIVE DRIVE
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Power Transfer
Unit (PTU). This system is automatic with no driver
inputs or additional driving skills required. Under nor-
mal driving conditions, the front wheels provide most of
the traction. If the front wheels begin to lose traction,
power is shifted automatically to the rear wheels. The
greater the front wheel traction loss, the greater the
power transfer to the rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input
(where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent
to the rear in a preemptive effort to improve vehicle
launch and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size
may cause failure of the Power Transfer Unit.
Four-Wheel Drive (4x4)
The four-wheel drive (4WD) is fully automatic in normal
driving mode.
NOTE:
It is not possible to carry out the change of mode when
the vehicle exceeds the speed of 75 mph (120 km/h).
Enabling Four-Wheel Drive (4x4)
The buttons for the activation of four-wheel drive are
located on the center console and allow you to select
the following:
•
4WD LOCK
•
4WD LOW — (Trailhawk Models Only)
Active Drive Control — If Equipped
The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) is locked to ensure imme-
diate availability of torque to the rear drive axles. This
feature is selectable in AUTO mode and automatic in
the other driving mode. 4WD LOCK can be enabled by
the following ways:
•
When the 4WD LOCK button is pushed.
•
When the Selec-Terrain switch is moved from AUTO
to any other off-road modes.
Active Drive With Low Control — (Trailhawk Models
Only)
The 4WD LOW mode helps to improve the off-road per-
formance in all modes. To enable 4WD LOW, see the
following:
Enabling 4WD LOW
With the vehicle stationary, the ignition in the ON/RUN
position or with the engine running, shift the transmis-
sion into NEUTRAL and push the 4WD LOW button
once. The instrument cluster will display the message
“4WD LOW” once the shift is complete.
NOTE:
•
Both LOCK and LOW LED lights will blink and then
become active on the buttons until the shift is
complete.
•
The instrument cluster display will illuminate the
4WD LOW icon.
Disabling 4WD LOW
To disable the 4WD LOW mode, the vehicle must be
stationary and the transmission shifted into NEUTRAL.
Push the 4WD LOW button once.
4WD Buttons
1 — 4WD LOW (Trailhawk Models Only)
2—4WDLOCK
92 STARTING AND OPERATING
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle
control systems, along with driver input, to provide the
best performance for all terrains.
MODE SELECTION GUIDE
•
AUTO: This four-wheel drive operation is a continu-
ous operation, is fully automatic and can be used on
and off road. This mode balances traction to ensure
maneuverability and acceleration improvement
compared to a vehicle with two wheel drive. This
mode also reduces fuel consumption, since it allows
the disconnect of the drive shaft where conditions
permit.
•
SNOW: This mode allows you to have greater stabil-
ity under conditions of bad weather. For use on and
off road on surfaces with poor traction, such as
roads covered with snow. When in SNOW mode
(depending on certain operating conditions), the
transmission may use SECOND gear (rather than
FIRST gear) during launches, to minimize wheel
slippage.
•
SAND/MUD: For off-road driving or use on surfaces
with poor traction, such as dry sand and roads cov-
ered by mud or wet grass. The transmission is set to
provide maximum traction.
•
ROCK: (Trailhawk only): This mode is only available
in 4WD LOW range. The device sets the vehicle to
maximize traction and allow the highest steering
capacity for off-road surfaces. This mode gives you
the maximum performance off-road. Use for low
speed obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc.
NOTE:
•
ROCK mode is only available on the vehicles
equipped with the Off-Road package.
•
Activate the Hill Descent Control for steep downhill
control
page 152.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and ease of maneuverabil-
ity. The electric power steering system adapts to differ-
ent driving conditions.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” or “POWER STEER-
ING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE SYSTEM” message and a
steering wheel icon are displayed on the instrument
cluster display, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be
taken to an authorized dealer for service. It is likely the
vehicle has lost power steering assistance
page 65.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM HOT - PERFOR-
MANCE MAY BE LIMITED” message and an icon are
displayed on the instrument cluster display, it indicates
that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred,
which caused an over temperature condition in the
electric power steering system. You will lose power
steering assistance momentarily until the over tempera-
ture condition no longer exists. Once driving conditions
are safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few
moments until the light turns off
page 65.
NOTE:
•
Even if the power steering system is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
•
If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer
for service.
Selec-Terrain Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 93
4
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is designed to reduce fuel con-
sumption. The system will stop the engine automatically
during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met.
Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator
pedal will automatically restart the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy-duty
starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine
parts, to handle the additional engine starts.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal
customer engine start. At that time, the system will go
into STOP/START READY.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must
Occur:
•
The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
“STOP/START READY” message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start
section
page 65.
•
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
•
The gear selector must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to
the zero position, and the Stop/Start telltale will illumi-
nate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings
will be maintained upon return to an engine-running
condition.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE
DOES NOT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/
Start system may be viewed in the instrument cluster
display Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations
the engine will not stop:
•
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
•
Driver’s door is not closed.
•
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
•
Battery charge is low.
•
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
•
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
•
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
speed.
•
HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
•
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
•
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
•
Hood is open.
•
Vehicle is in 4WD LOW transfer case mode.
•
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
•
Accelerator pedal input.
•
Engine temperature is too high.
•
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold has not been achieved
from previous Autostop.
•
Steering angle beyond threshold.
•
Adaptive Cruise Control is on and speed is set.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of
the items previously listed.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
AUTOSTOP MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is pressed.
The transmission will automatically re-engage upon
engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Auto-
matically While In Autostop Mode:
•
The transmission selector is moved out of
DRIVE (D).
•
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
•
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
•
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted.
•
Battery voltage drops too low.
•
Stop/Start OFF switch is pressed.
•
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
•
Vehicle is in 4WD LOW transfer case mode.
•
Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold.
Conditions That Force An Application Of The Electric
Park Brake While In Autostop Mode:
•
The driver’s door is open and brake pedal released.
•
The driver’s door is open and the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled.
•
The engine hood has been opened.
•
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
94 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is applied with the
engine off, the engine may require a manual restart
and the EPB may require a manual release (press brake
pedal and press EPB switch)
page 65.
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE
STOP/START SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will illuminate. The
“STOP/START OFF” message will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display and the Autostop mode will be dis-
abled
page 65.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an ON
condition every time the ignition is turned off and
back on.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE
STOP/START SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE
STOP/START SYSTEM” message and a yellow Stop/
Start telltale will appear in the instrument cluster dis-
play
page 65.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message
appears in the instrument cluster display, have the sys-
tem checked by an authorized dealer.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Control
system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system:
•
Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a constant
preset speed.
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the vehicle
speed up to the preset speed to maintain a distance
with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
•
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not enabled,
Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the fea-
ture selected.
•
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a
time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable,
and vice versa.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over accelera-
tor operations at speeds greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side
of the steering wheel.
Stop/Start OFF Switch
Cruise Control Buttons
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (-)/Decel
4 — On/Off
5 — RES/Resume
STARTING AND OPERATING 95
4
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose con-
trol and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise Control.
“CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control is on.
To turn the system off, push the on/off button a second
time. “CRUISE CONTROL OFF” will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control is off.
The system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system
or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always turn the system
OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push and release the SET
(+) or SET (-) button. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a
speed has been set, a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET
TO MPH (km/h)” will appear indicating the set speed.
A Cruise Control Set Indicator Light, along with set
speed will also appear and stay on in the instrument
cluster when the speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed
by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
•
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result ina1mphspeed adjustment. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of
1 mph.
•
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust until the button is released,
then the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result ina1km/hspeed adjustment. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of
1 km/h.
•
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust until the button is released,
then the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the accelerator to
pass as you would normally. When the pedal is
released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without Cruise
Control.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose con-
trol and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, or pushing the CANC button,
or normal brake pressure will deactivate the Cruise
Control system without erasing the set speed from
memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the Cruise
Control without erasing the set speed from memory:
•
Vehicle parking brake is applied
•
Stability event occurs
•
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
•
Engine overspeed occurs
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the
OFF position, will erase the set speed from memory.
96 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving con-
venience provided by Cruise Control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
The Cruise Control function performs differently if your
vehicle is not equipped with ACC
page 95.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your speed. ACC utilizes a radar sensor
and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you to maintain a set speed.
NOTE:
•
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed
of the vehicle ahead.
•
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to
the vehicle will affect the performance of the Adap-
tive Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning
system.
•
Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled) will
not detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be
aware of the feature selected
page 259.
WARNING!
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather condi-
tions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead
(Continued)
WARNING!
and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure
safe operation of the vehicle under all road condi-
tions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
•
The ACC system:
○ Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
○ Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
○ Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
You should turn the ACC system off:
•
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
•
When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
•
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
•
When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel
operate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The information it displays depends on
ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
until one of the following appears in the instrument
cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — Distance Increase Button
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
3 — CANC/Cancel
4 — Distance Decrease Button
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off (If Equipped)
7 — RES/Resume
8 — SET (-)/Decel
STARTING AND OPERATING 97
4
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, the
display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instru-
ment cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of the
following ACC activity occurs:
•
System Cancel
•
Driver Override
•
System Off
•
ACC Proximity Warning
•
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state,
the instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display
will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
•
When in 4WD Low
•
When the brakes are applied
•
When the parking brake is applied
•
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL
•
When the vehicle speed is below the minimum
speed range
•
When the brakes are overheated
•
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
•
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low
speeds
•
When there is a stationary vehicle in front of your
vehicle in close proximity
•
When ESC Full Off Mode is active
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster
display will read “ACC Ready.” Then proceed to setting
the desired speed as described in the next section.
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time,
the system will turn off and the instrument cluster dis-
play will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.” The
system will also turn off during any of the conditions
listed in “To Turn Off”
page 99.
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The
instrument cluster display will show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without ACC
enabled. To change between the different modes, push
the ACC on/off button which turns the ACC and the
Fixed Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing the Fixed
Speed Cruise Control on/off button will result in turning
on (changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed will default to 20 mph
(32 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20 mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
98 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can
cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond
the set speed. If this occurs, the message “DRIVER
OVERRIDE” will display in the instrument cluster
display.
•
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed
while ACC is enabled, the system will not be control-
ling the distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be deter-
mined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed
Cruise Control systems:
•
The brake pedal is applied
•
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
•
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
•
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
•
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates
•
The vehicle parking brake is applied
•
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
•
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode
•
The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
system:
•
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
•
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
•
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed
•
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is
pushed
•
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
•
4WD Low is engaged
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
(resume) button and remove your foot from the accel-
erator pedal. The instrument cluster display will show
the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
being used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph
(0 km/h) when ACC is active.
NOTE:
•
If your vehicle is at standstill longer than two sec-
onds, the driver will either have to push the RES
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) to the
existing set speed.
•
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by push-
ing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
•
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result ina1mphspeed adjustment. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of
1 mph.
•
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result ina1km/hspeed adjustment. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an adjustment of
1 km/h.
•
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until
the button is released. The new set speed is
reflected in the instrument cluster display.
STARTING AND OPERATING 99
4
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET
(-) button, the new set speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
When ACC Is Active
•
When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
•
The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full
stop when following the vehicle in front. If your
vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill,
after two seconds the driver will either have to push
the RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator
pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing set speed.
•
The ACC system maintains set speed when driving
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change
on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshift-
ing may occur while climbing uphill or descending
downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to
maintain set speed. When driving uphill and down-
hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking tem-
perature exceeds normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (lon-
gest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar
(short). Using this distance setting and the vehicle
speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the
vehicle ahead. This distance setting will show in the
instrument cluster display.
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance
Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar
(longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance
Decrease button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane,
the instrument cluster display will show the ACC Set
With Target Detected Light. The system will then adjust
vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance
setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
•
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
set speed.
•
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
•
The distance setting is changed.
•
The system disengages page 98.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC sys-
tem applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to main-
tain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE!” will flash in the instrument cluster display
and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking force.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display
is a warning for the driver to take action and does not
necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning
system is applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
engaged and following a vehicle, the system will provide
an additional acceleration up to the ACC set speed to
assist in passing the vehicle. This additional accelera-
tion is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
signal and will only be active when passing on the left
hand side.
Distance Settings
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
100 STARTING AND OPERATING
ACC Operation At Stop
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to
a standstill while following a vehicle in front, if the
vehicle in front starts moving within two seconds of
your vehicle coming to a standstill, your vehicle will
resume motion without the need for any driver action.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the
driver will either have to push the RES (resume) button,
or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to
the existing set speed.
NOTE:
After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a standstill
for approximately three consecutive minutes, the park-
ing brake will be activated, and the ACC system will be
canceled.
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the
driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver door is
opened, the parking brake will be activated, and the
ACC system will be canceled.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
VEHICLE” WARNING
The “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and a chime will sound when condi-
tions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such
as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such
as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the instrument clus-
ter display will display the preceding message and the
system will deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow, or tunnels
with reflective tiles). The ACC system will recover after
the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in
its path this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still
available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal
of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of
the vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is impor-
tant to note the following maintenance items:
•
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
•
Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure
and require a sensor realignment.
•
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged
due to a collision, see an authorized dealer for
service.
•
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material or aftermar-
ket grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system fail-
ure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
Installing a snowplow, front-end protector, an aftermar-
ket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended.
Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC
operation.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
warning will display and a chime will sound when condi-
tions temporarily limit system performance. This most
often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow
or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such
as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside
of glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster display
will read “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” and the system will have degraded
performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in adverse weather conditions. The ACC system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under
rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking any
vehicles or objects in its path this warning may tempo-
rarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rearview mirror. They may
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is
no longer present, the system will return to full
functionality.
STARTING AND OPERATING 101
4
NOTE:
If the “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once
on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstructions, have the windshield and forward facing
camera inspected at an authorized dealer.
SERVICE ACC WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster dis-
play reads “ACC Unavailable Service Required” or
“Cruise Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an
internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still driv-
able under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily
unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again later,
following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see
an authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-
edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene. The following are examples of these types of
situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
Towing a trailer is not recommended when using ACC.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merg-
ing in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may
move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause
your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may increase or decrease the vehicle speed for stabil-
ity, with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the vehicle is
out of the curve, the system will resume your original
set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending on
the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hill.
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the following lane
changing example, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until
it's too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may
not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the lane-
changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to
apply the brakes if necessary.
Offset Driving Condition Example ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing Example
102 STARTING AND OPERATING
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until
they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or vehicles. For
example, ACC will not react in situations where the
vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle
ahead is stopped in your lane. It will consider this
stopped vehicle a stationary object as it did not previ-
ously detect movement from it. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The Traffic Sign Assist (TSA) system uses a camera
mounted on the windshield, as well as map data when
the vehicle is equipped with Navigation, to detect recog-
nizable road signs such as:
•
Speed limits
•
School zones
•
No passing zones
NOTE:
•
The TSA system will automatically display the road
sign detected in the unit of measurement (mph
or km/h) selected within Uconnect Settings or within
the instrument cluster display.
•
If no speed limit signs are detected, the system will
revert to the speed limit signs that are stored in the
Navigation system.
•
The system always checks the traffic signs indicat-
ing the current speed limit signs. The system is able
to recognize and display up to two different road
signs in the instrument cluster display.
ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION
The TSA System can be enabled/disabled within the
Uconnect system through the Safety/Driver Assistance
menu. System ON is signaled by road signs shown on
the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
Even if the system is OFF, the speed limit sign will be
displayed when the driver selects it in the HOME
screen.
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST MODES
TSA has three selectable modes of operation that are
available through the Uconnect system.
Visual
When Visual is selected, the system will alert the driver
when the current speed of the vehicle exceeds the
detected speed limit by showing a graphic in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Visual + Chime
When Visual + Chime is selected, the system will alert
the driver when the current speed of the vehicle
exceeds the detected speed limit by showing a graphic
in the instrument cluster display, and by sounding an
audible alert. The audible alert will last for 10 seconds,
and the visual alert will remain on as long as the
vehicle is exceeding the speed limit.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the TSA sys-
tem, the radio is also muted.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
STARTING AND OPERATING 103
4
TSA Off
When the TSA system is turned off, the system will not
show any traffic signs (unless selected in the HOME
screen, which will show detected speed limit signs), and
no alerts will be issued to the driver.
INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY
Detected traffic signs are shown in the instrument clus-
ter display, and can display any combination of signs at
one time (e.g. speed limit, speed limit and supplemen-
tal info, and “Do Not Pass” signs) depending on what
information is available.
When a newly detected speed limit is higher than the
current speed limit, the display will update along with
an up arrow.
When a newly detected speed limit is lower than the
current speed limit, the display will update along with a
down arrow.
NOTE:
Up or down arrows will be displayed for up to five
seconds.
Supplemental Information
Supplemental information may be displayed along with
a newly detected speed limit, indicating special circum-
stances of which the driver should be aware. Available
supplemental information includes:
•
School
•
Construction
•
Rain
•
Snow
•
Fog
NOTE:
Supplemental information will not be displayed when
the vehicle is ONLY equipped with GPS.
Speed Limit Exceeded
When the vehicle speed exceeds the displayed speed
limit by 3 mph (5 km/h), the speed limit sign on the
instrument cluster display will show a red outline to
alert the driver.
CAUTION!
•
Traffic Sign Assist is designed to assist the driver
and is not a substitute for the driver. It is always
the driver’s responsibility to continue to monitor
the speed limit and vehicle speed, and to operate
the vehicle in a manner safe for the road
conditions.
•
Functionality may be limited or the system may not
work if the sensor is obstructed.
•
The system may have limited operation or not work
at all in weather conditions such as heavy rain,
hail, and thick fog. Strong light contrasts can influ-
ence the recognition capability of the sensor.
•
The area surrounding the sensor must not be cov-
ered with stickers or any other object.
•
Do not tamper or perform any operations in the
area of the windshield glass directly surrounding
the sensor.
•
Clean foreign matters such as bird droppings,
insects, snow or ice on the windshield. Use specific
detergents and clean cloths to avoid scratching the
windshield.
Traffic Signs Recognized
1 — Current Speed Limit With Supplemental Informa-
tion (School Zone)
2 — Next Speed Limit Detected
3 — No Passing Zone Detected
104 STARTING AND OPERATING
HIGHWAY ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
OPERATION
The Highway Assist system (HAS) is combined with the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system, and centers the
vehicle in the driving lane while traveling at speeds up
to 90 mph (145 km/h).
For ACC system operating instructions and system limi-
tations, see
page 97.
NOTE:
•
The driver should always obey traffic laws and
speed limits. Never drive above applicable speed
limit restrictions.
•
The driver can override HAS at any time by braking,
accelerating, or steering the vehicle.
Just like ACC, HAS will maintain a set speed as long as
the set distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front is maintained. HAS will also keep your vehicle
centered between the lane lines, and monitor for other
vehicles in adjacent lanes by utilizing the Blind Spot
Monitoring sensors.
HAS uses sensors within the steering wheel to measure
driver attentiveness. HAS requires the driver’s hands on
the steering wheel at all times. The system will gener-
ally aim to keep the vehicle centered in the lane, but
when the driver turns the steering wheel (e.g. to move
farther away from a large vehicle in an adjacent lane)
the system will reduce its control and enter "co-
steering" mode. While in co-steering mode, the system
will provide reduced assistance and allow the driver to
control the path of the vehicle. Once the driver stops
providing input to the steering wheel, the system will
require a few seconds to fully resume lane centering
assistance, especially during curves.
WARNING!
The Highway Assist system is a convenience system.
It is not a substitute for active driver involvement. It is
always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of
road traffic, weather conditions, vehicle speed, dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead, position in the lane com-
pared to other vehicles, and brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-
sion and death or serious personal injury.
You should turn off the Highway Assist system:
•
When driving in complex driving situations (e.g.
urban environments, construction zones, etc.),
adverse weather or low visibility conditions (e.g.
rain, snow, fog, sleet, dust), or adverse road condi-
tions (e.g. heavy traffic, worn or missing lane mark-
ings, etc.).
•
When entering a highway off-ramp, when driving
on roads that are icy, snow covered, or slippery.
•
When driving during difficult or uncertain
conditions.
TURNING HIGHWAY ASSIST ON
OR OFF
To enable the Highway Assist system, proceed as
follows:
1. Push the Highway Assist on/off button located on
the right side of the steering wheel. The steering
wheel image will display white in the instrument
cluster display until the system is engaged. If ACC
was previously disabled, pushing this button will
activate BOTH ACC and Highway Assist systems.
2. If ACC was engaged before pushing the HAS on/off
button, ACC will remain active and HAS will also
become engaged (once all other conditions are
met).
3. If ACC was not active before pushing the HAS on/off
button, push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button
and release when the desired driving speed is
shown in the instrument cluster display.
Highway Assist On/Of f Button
STARTING AND OPERATING 105
4
4. If desired, adjust the ACC distance setting by push-
ing the Distance Increase or Distance Decrease
buttons.
When all system conditions are met as described in
“System Engagement Conditions” in the next section,
the system will engage and the steering wheel image in
the display will change to green.
NOTE:
Along with the color change of the steering wheel
image, the “glow” effect of the instrument cluster dis-
play will also change to green when HAS is engaged.
System Engagement Conditions
The following conditions must be met after enabling the
Highway Assist system before the system will engage:
•
Highway Assist system is enabled
•
Driver seat belt is buckled
•
System detects visible lane markings
•
Vehicle is traveling below 90 mph (145 km/h)
•
Vehicle is centered in lane
•
Turn signal is not activated
•
Vehicle is not in a tight curve
•
Trailer is not connected
•
Driver has hands on steering wheel
NOTE:
For the system to detect the driver’s hands on the steer-
ing wheel, the wheel must be gripped on the outside.
Gripping the inside areas of the steering wheel will not
satisfy the hands-on condition to engage the system.
System Deactivation
The system will be deactivated in any of the following
situations:
•
If the system has detected driver inattentiveness,
and has gone through all escalation warnings
•
If lane markings are no longer detected
•
If the brake pedal is pressed or ACC system is
deactivated
•
If a turn signal is used (unless a target is in the blind
spot zone on the same side the turn signal is being
applied)
•
If the driver applies enough input to the steering
wheel
•
If the driver’s seat belt is released
•
If the vehicle speed exceeds 90 mph (145 km/h)
•
If the Highway Assist system on/off button is pushed
again (HAS will turn off)
•
If the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system
becomes active and is providing warnings/braking
NOTE:
•
HAS will not enable if the system detects a trailer is
connected to the vehicle.
•
Pushing the Highway Assist on/off button will turn
the system off. All other deactivation conditions will
place the system back into the “enabled” state with
the steering wheel indicator displayed in white until
all engagement conditions are met again.
•
When the system is deactivated, the system status
indicator lights will turn off, Active Lane Manage-
ment will return to its previous state, and ACC will
disable.
INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY
The Highway Assist system status can always be viewed
in the instrument cluster display, and status changes
are shown by changes in color of the system’s indicator
lights.
As the system detects driver inattentiveness as previ-
ously described
page 105, the system status indi-
cator lights will change from green, to yellow, to red.
The following indicators will change in color as warnings
to the driver escalate:
•
Highway Assist Indicator (steering wheel icon in the
instrument cluster display)
Highway Assist Engaged (Steering Wheel Green)
Do Not Grip Inside Of Steering Wheel
106 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Glow effect of the instrument cluster display
If driver attention is not returned, the system will
deactivate.
Highway Assist Indicators Are Off
•
HAS is not turned on/enabled by the driver.
Highway Assist Indicators Are White
•
HAS is turned on/enabled by the driver, but the sys-
tem is not actively steering and providing speed con-
trol for to the vehicle.
Highway Assist Indicators Are Green
•
The system detects driver is attentive and is actively
steering and providing speed control for the vehicle.
Highway Assist Indicators Are Yellow
•
Driver inattentiveness has been detected, warning
the driver to place hands on the steering wheel.
Highway Assist Indicators Are Red
•
Driver inattentiveness is still being detected, or
driver take-over is being requested, warning the
driver to place hands on the steering wheel. This
warning is also issued when the system has
detected a tight curve and is warning the driver to
take control.
NOTE:
The driver MUST replace hands on the steering wheel
and take control of the vehicle when the system is
deactivated.
SYSTEM STATUS
Along with changes in the system’s indicator lights
(green, yellow, and red), the system can also issue sev-
eral accompanying warnings intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate a
potential collision.
•
Two haptic brake jerk warnings will be issued (red
warning light is being issued).
•
A steering wheel vibration warning (if enabled) will
occur if the vehicle crosses a lane marker, for
example, when driving on a tight curve. The steering
wheel vibration feature can be turned on or off
within the Uconnect system
page 133.
SYSTEM OPERATION/LIMITATIONS
WARNING!
Highway Assist is an SAE Level 2 Driver Assist feature,
requiring driver attention at all times. To prevent seri-
ous injury or death:
•
Always remember that the Highways Assist system
is a convenience system that cannot accurately
detect all situations. Complete attention is always
required while driving, even when using the High-
way Assist system.
•
Always remain alert and be ready to take control of
the vehicle in the event that the Highway Assist
system deactivates, or otherwise lacks full func-
tionality as described further before and after this
statement.
•
Always keep your hands on the steering wheel
when the Highway Assist system is activated.
•
Do not use a hand-held device when the Highway
Assist system is engaged.
•
Maintain a safe distance from other vehicles and
pay attention to traffic conditions. The Highway
Assist system will not steer to avoid safety hazards,
constructions zones, objects, or road impediments.
You need to take control to steer and brake the
vehicle in such situations, and when merging into
traffic, exiting the highway, making a turn for cross-
ing traffic, or stopping for traffic control devices.
•
Do not place any objects on the steering wheel
(e.g. steering wheel covers) which could interfere
with the hand detection sensors.
Highway Assist Cancelled Message
STARTING AND OPERATING 107
4
The Highway Assist system DOES NOT:
•
Warn or prevent collisions with other vehicles
•
Steer your vehicle around stopped vehicles, slower
vehicles, construction zones or equipment, pedestri-
ans, or animals
•
Respond to traffic lights or stop signs
•
Merge onto highways or exit off ramps
•
Change lanes or turn
•
React to cross traffic
NOTE:
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a core component of
the Highway Assist system. For ACC system limitations
page 97.
The Highway Assist system may have limited or reduced
functionality when one of the following conditions
occur:
•
The vehicle’s radar sensors and/or forward facing
camera is damaged, covered, misaligned, or
obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice, snow, etc.)
•
If the suspension alignment is not correct, if the
vehicle is modified (e.g. lifting or lowering the sus-
pension, installing different sized wheels or tires)
•
Driving near highway toll booths
NOTE:
If damage to the windshield occurs, have the wind-
shield replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear,
and if equipped, the front fascia/bumper and a
detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward
(e.g. during a parking maneuver).
NOTE:
•
The system is designed to assist the driver and not
to substitute the driver.
•
The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's
acceleration and braking and is responsible for con-
trolling the vehicle's movements
page 111.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense is active in DRIVE or REVERSE, as long as
the system is on. The system will remain active until the
vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. While in REVERSE and above the
system's operating speed, a warning will appear in the
instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle speed
is too fast. The system will become active again if the
vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approxi-
mately 6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The six ParkSense sensors (four when vehicle is not
equipped with front sensors), located in the rear fascia/
bumper, and the six ParkSense sensors located in the
front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front and
behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of
view. The front sensors detect obstacles from approxi-
mately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm)
from the front fascia/bumper. The rear sensors can
detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper.
These distances depend on the location, type and ori-
entation of the obstacle in the horizontal direction.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
“Sound and Display” is selected from the Customer -
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect sys-
tem
page 133.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
instrument cluster display
page 65. It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and
the detected obstacle.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the
vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in the left and/or right front or rear regions
based on the object’s distance and location relative to
the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left
and/or right rear region and the system will produce a
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the dis-
play will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 sec-
ond tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
108 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front/Rear/Side ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 11 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arcs
6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 12 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arcs
STARTING AND OPERATING 109
4
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches (200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single, 1/2 second,
audible chime is
heard
Audible chime increases as the objects get closer to the vehicle Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
47 inches (120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None None None
Audible chime
increases as the
objects get close to
the vehicle
Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audible tone.
110 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible
alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when
an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is station-
ary, and brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected
from the Uconnect system
page 133.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and
high.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
ENABLING AND DISABLING
PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense switch, located on the
switch panel below the Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster display
page 65 will show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message
for approximately five seconds.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense
is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch
LED will be off when the system is enabled. If the
ParkSense switch is pushed, and requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System
has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster
will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and
it will display the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message for five seconds.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS"
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure
the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear
of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstructions and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear
see an authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED"
message appears in the instrument cluster display, see
an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do
not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could
damage the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
PRECAUTIONS
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the front and rear fascias/bumpers are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
•
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations
could affect the performance of ParkSense.
•
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument clus-
ter display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.” Further-
more, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the
ignition.
•
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
•
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
•
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, etc.
are attached to the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to
do so can result in the system misinterpreting a
close object as a sensor problem, causing the
“ParkSense Unavailable Service Required” message
to be displayed in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
If any objects are attached to the bumper within a
6.5 ft (2 m) field of view, they will interfere and
cause false alerts and possibly blockage.
•
There may be a delay in the object detection rate if
the object is moving.
•
The rear sensors are automatically deactivated
when the trailer’s electric plug is inserted in the
vehicle’s tow socket. The front sensors stay active
and can provide acoustic and visual warnings. The
rear sensors are automatically reactivated when the
trailer's cable plug is removed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 111
4
WARNING!
•
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue
to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
•
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly be disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia/bumper when the
vehicle sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sen-
sors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
•
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
SIDE DISTANCE WARNING (SDW)
SYSTEM
The Side Distance Warning system has the function of
detecting the presence of side obstacles near the
vehicle using the parking sensors located in the front
and rear fascias/bumpers.
Side Distance Warning Display
The Side Distance Warning screen will only be displayed
if this feature is enabled within Uconnect Settings
page 133.
The system warns the driver with an acoustic signal and
when selected, with visual indications on the instru-
ment panel display
page 65.
WARNING ALERTS
Distance
(in/cm)
Less than
30 inches
(76 cm)
30 – 65 inches
(76–165 cm)
Arcs-Left 11th Flashing 12th Flashing
Arcs-Right 11th Flashing 12th Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
Audible alert only when the vehicle
is on course for a collision
Radio Volume
Reduced
Yes Yes
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio if on
when the system is sounding an audible tone.
Activation/Deactivation
The system can operate only after driving a short dis-
tance and if the vehicle speed is between 0 and 7 mph
(0 and 11 km/h). The system can be activated/
deactivated via the "Settings" menu of the Uconnect
system. If the ParkSense System is deactivated via the
ParkSense switch, then the side distance warning sys-
tem will automatically be deactivated.
NOTE:
The vehicle needs to be driven approximately one car
length in order for the Side Distance Warning system to
activate.
Side Distance Warning System Status
1 — System Not Active
2 — System Active
112 STARTING AND OPERATING
Operation With A Trailer
The system is automatically deactivated when the trail-
er's electric plug is inserted in the vehicle's tow hook
socket. The rear sensors are automatically reactivated
when the trailer's cable plug is removed.
ParkSense Usage Precautions
Some conditions may influence the performance of the
Side Distance Warning system:
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the front and rear fascias/bumpers are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
•
Construction equipment, large trucks, and other
vibrations could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
•
When you turn ParkSense off, the message in the
instrument cluster display will read “PARKSENSE
OFF.” Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if you
cycle the ignition key.
•
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
•
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
•
The presence of a tow hook without a trailer may
interfere with the correct operation of the parking
sensors. Before using the ParkSense system, it is
recommended to remove the removable tow hook
ball assembly and any attachments from the vehicle
when it is not used for towing operations. If you
leave the tow hook fitted when not towing a trailer,
the tow hook could be detected as an obstacle by
the sensors. Contact your authorized dealer to
update the ParkSense system operations.
WARNING!
•
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue
to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
•
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly be disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia/bumper when the
vehicle sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sen-
sors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
•
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
— IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to
assist the driver during parallel, perpendicular, and par-
allel park exit maneuvers by identifying a proper parking
space, providing audible/visual instructions, and con-
trolling the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park
Assist system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the
driver maintains control of the accelerator, gear selec-
tor and brakes. Depending on the driver's parking
maneuver selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system is capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a par-
allel or a perpendicular parking space on either side
(i.e., driver side or passenger side), as well as exiting a
parallel parking space.
STARTING AND OPERATING 113
4
NOTE:
•
The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects,
and must intervene as required.
•
The system is designed to assist the driver and not
to substitute the driver.
•
During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
touches the steering wheel after being instructed to
remove their hands from the steering wheel, the
system will cancel, and the driver will be required to
manually complete the parking maneuver.
•
The system may not work in all conditions (e.g. envi-
ronmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, etc.,
or if searching for a parking space that has surfaces
that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
•
New vehicles from the dealer must have at least
30 miles (48 km) accumulated before the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is fully cali-
brated and performs accurately. This is due to the
system’s dynamic vehicle calibration to improve the
performance of the feature.
ENABLING AND DISABLING THE
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system
can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch, located
on the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
To enable or disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, push the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch
once (LED turns on). Pushing the switch a second time
will disable the system (LED turns off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off
automatically for any of the following conditions:
•
Parking maneuver is complete.
•
Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph (30 km/h)
when searching for a parking space.
•
Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) dur-
ing active steering guidance into the parking space.
•
Steering Wheel is touched during active steering
guidance into the parking space.
•
ParkSense Park Assist switch is pushed.
•
Driver's door is opened.
•
Rear liftgate is opened.
•
Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking System
intervention.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum number of shifts between DRIVE and
REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed within
the maximum amount of shifts, the system will cancel
and the instrument cluster display will instruct the
driver to complete the maneuver manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only oper-
ate and search for a parking space when the following
conditions are present:
•
Gear selector is in DRIVE.
•
Ignition is in the RUN position.
•
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated.
•
Driver's door is closed.
•
Rear liftgate is closed.
•
The outer surface and the underside of the front
and rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstructions.
•
Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is driven above approximately 15 mph
(25 km/h), the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to slow down. If the vehicle is
driven above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the
system will cancel. The driver must then reactivate
the system by pushing the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED
will turn off if any of the preceding conditions are not
present.
PARALLEL/PERPENDICULAR
PARKING SPACE ASSISTANCE
OPERATION
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
enabled, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press
or to Switch Maneuver” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display. You may select perpendicu-
lar, parallel, or parallel park exit. The arrow buttons on
the left side of the steering wheel can be used to switch
parking maneuvers.
114 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
When searching for a parking space, use the turn
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle
you want to perform the parking maneuver. The
ParkSense Active Park Assist system will automati-
cally search for a parking space on the passenger's
side of the vehicle if the turn signal is not activated.
•
The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and
clear of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles,
etc.).
•
The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and
free/clear of anything that may be overhanging or
protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tail-
gates, etc. from surrounding objects/vehicles).
•
When searching for a parking space, the driver
should drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending
on the type of maneuver) to other vehicles as
possible.
•
The feature will only indicate the last detected park-
ing space (example: if passing multiple available
parking spaces, the system will only indicate the last
detected parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and
the vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to
move forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular
or parallel parking sequence (depending on the type of
maneuver being performed).
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands
from the steering wheel. When the vehicle comes to a
standstill (your hands still removed from the steering
wheel), you will be instructed to place the gear selector
into the REVERSE position.
The system may then instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete before then instructing to check
surroundings and move backward.
The system may instruct several more gear shifts
(DRIVE and REVERSE), with hands off of the steering
wheel, before instructing the driver to check surround-
ings and complete the parking maneuver.
Active ParkSense Searching
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Move Backward Into Parallel Parking Space
Move Backward Into Perpendicular Parking Space
STARTING AND OPERATING 115
4
When the vehicle is in the parking position, the maneu-
ver is complete and the driver will be instructed to
check the vehicle's parking position, then shift the
vehicle into PARK. The message "Active ParkSense
Complete - Check Parking Position" will be displayed
momentarily.
NOTE:
•
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking
maneuver.
•
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their sur-
roundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is
required.
•
When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should
check their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
•
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and
REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed
within six shifts, the system will cancel and the
instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to
complete the maneuver manually.
•
The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steer-
ing guidance into the parking space. The system will
provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h)
that tells them to slow down. The driver is then
responsible for completing the maneuver if the
system is canceled.
•
If the system is canceled during the maneuver for
any reason, the driver must take control of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Drivers must be careful when performing parallel
or perpendicular parking maneuvers even when
using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system.
Always check carefully behind and in front of your
vehicle, look behind and in front of you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up and moving forward. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention
to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
•
Before using the ParkSense Active Park Assist sys-
tem, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly be disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or dam-
age to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear
fascia/bumper when the vehicle sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the
ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on
its size and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors will
not be detected when they are in close proximity.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
•
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected.
It is recommended that the driver looks over his/
her shoulder when using the ParkSense Active
Park Assist system.
EXITING THE PARKING SPACE
NOTE:
The function does not work for exiting a perpendicular
parking space, but only exiting parallel parking spaces.
Activation
To activate this function, shift to DRIVE, push the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch, and then use the
steering wheel arrow buttons to select the Parallel Park
Exit feature. After the selection, the system activates
and instructs the driver through the instrument cluster
display about the operations that have to be carried out
to perform the maneuver correctly.
Start Of Maneuver
During the maneuver, the system asks the driver to
shift to REVERSE, and operate the turn signal in the
direction you want to exit. Let go of the steering wheel
and use the brake or accelerator pedals while the sys-
tem handles the steering automatically for exiting the
parking space. If the driver continues to carry out a vol-
untary or involuntary action on the steering wheel dur-
ing the exit maneuver (touching or holding the steering
wheel to prevent its movement), the maneuver will be
interrupted.
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
End Of Maneuver
The semi-automatic maneuver ends when the display
shows the message of a completed maneuver. At the
end of the maneuver, the system gives back the vehicle
control to the driver.
Important Information
•
If the sensors undergo impact which alters their
position, the system operation could be greatly
affected.
•
The sensors reach top performance after the vehicle
has gone about 30 miles (50 km) due to the
dynamic tire circumference calculations used for
parking.
•
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
•
Construction equipment, large trucks, and other
vibrations could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
•
Sensors may detect a nonexistent obstacle (echo
noise) due to mechanical noises, for example while
washing the vehicle or in the case of rain, strong
wind, and hail.
•
The sensors may not detect objects of a particular
shape or made from particular materials (very thin
poles, trailer beams, panels, nets, bushes, anti-
parking posts, pavements, rubbish bins, motor
vehicles, etc.). Always take great care to check that
the vehicle and its path are actually compatible with
the parking place identified by the system.
•
The use of wheels and tires that are different size to
the original equipment could affect the operation of
the system.
•
The operation of the rear sensors is automatically
deactivated when the trailer's electric plug is inserted
in the vehicle's tow hook socket, while the front sen-
sors stay active and can provide acoustic and visual
warnings. If this situation occurs, Active Park Assist will
not work. The rear sensors are automatically reacti-
vated when the trailer's cable plug is removed.
•
In "Search in Progress" mode, the system could
incorrectly identify a parking place to carry out the
maneuver (e.g. by a junction, driveways, roads cross-
ing the direction of travel, etc.).
•
In the case of parking maneuvers on roads with
inclines, the performance of the system could be
inferior and it may deactivate.
•
If a parking maneuver is being carried out between
two parked vehicles alongside a curb, the system
may cause the vehicle to drive up onto the curb.
•
Some maneuvers at very tight bends might be
impossible to be carried out.
•
Take great care to ensure that conditions do not
change during the parking maneuver (e.g. if there
are persons and/or animals in the parking place,
moving vehicles, etc.) and intervene immediately if
necessary.
•
During parking maneuvers, pay attention to vehicles
approaching from the opposite direction. Always
abide by the law and road regulations.
NOTE:
•
Correct system operation is not guaranteed if snow
chains or the compact spare tire are fitted.
•
The function only informs the driver about the last
appropriate parking place (parallel or perpendicular)
detected by the parking sensors.
•
Some messages displayed are accompanied by
acoustic warnings.
Shift To Reverse Then Move Backward
Shift To Drive Then Move Forward
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
4
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT
OPERATION
The Active Lane Management (ALM) system uses a for-
ward facing camera to detect lane markings or road
edges and to measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries. It also uses the Blind Spot Monitoring
(BSM) sensors to detect vehicles in adjacent lanes
while the driver is preparing to change lanes.
The system is operational at speeds above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
When both lane markings are detected, and the vehicle
approaches (or crosses) the lane marking with no turn
signal applied, and the blind spot zone is not occupied,
the ALM system provides warnings to prompt the driver
to remain within the lane boundaries. These warnings
include a visual warning in the instrument cluster along
with steering assist torque (if configured in Uconnect
Settings).
If the driver crosses the lane marking, the system will
either guide the vehicle back to the center of the lane,
provide a vibration in the steering wheel, or both,
depending on radio settings.
When both lane markings are detected, and the driver
uses the turn signal to indicate a lane change, and a
vehicle is detected in the BSM zone on that side of the
vehicle, the ALM system provides a warning in the form
of steering assist and/or steering vibration (depending
on radio settings) to guide the vehicle back to the cen-
ter of the lane.
NOTE:
•
The system will suppress visual warnings, steering
vibration (if selected in radio settings), and steering
assistance (if selected in radio settings) when the
driver activates the turn signal, the blind spot zone
is clear of vehicles, and a lane change is occurring.
•
If the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system detects a
vehicle in the adjacent lane, and the turn signal is
applied in that direction, the BSM LED on the mirror
will flash. If the driver continues to attempt the lane
change, steering wheel torque will be provided to
keep the vehicle within its lane markings.
The driver may manually override the steering assist
warning by applying force to the steering wheel at any
time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the
driver drifts across the lane marking (no turn signal
applied), the Active Lane Management system provides
a visual warning in the instrument cluster, as well as a
steering assist torque (if configured in Uconnect Set-
tings), to prompt the driver to remain within the lane
boundaries. If the driver continues to drift out of the
lane, the system provides a flashing visual warning
through the instrument cluster display as well as a hap-
tic steering wheel vibration (if configured in Uconnect
Settings) when the vehicle crosses the lane boundary.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the Active
Lane Management system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provides an
audible and visual warning to the driver if removed. The
system will cancel if the driver does not return their
hands to the wheel.
TURNING ACTIVE LANE
MANAGEMENT ON OR OFF
The Active Lane Management button is
located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
To turn the system on, push the Active Lane
Management button (LED turns off). A message is
shown in the instrument cluster display.
To turn the system off, push the button again (LED
turns on).
NOTE:
The Active Lane Management system will retain the last
system state on or off from the last ignition cycle when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT
WARNING MESSAGE
The Active Lane Management system will indicate the
current lane drift condition through the instrument clus-
ter display.
When the system is on, the lane lines are gray when
both of the lane boundaries have not been detected.
118 STARTING AND OPERATING
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
•
When the system is on and only the left lane mark-
ing has been detected, and the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster
display and a vibration and/or steering assist
warning in the steering wheel if a lane departure
occurs, the left lane line will be green.
•
When the system senses the lane line has been
approached (but not crossed), the left lane line will
change to solid yellow and the system will provide a
haptic steering wheel vibration and/or steering
assist torque (if programmed in Uconnect Settings).
•
When the system senses the lane line is being
crossed, the left lane line will change to flashing
yellow.
NOTE:
The Active Lane Management system operates with
similar behavior for a right lane departure when only
the right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
•
When the system is on, the lane lines turn from gray
to green to indicate that both of the lane markings
have been detected. When both lane markings have
been detected, the system is ready to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display and a
vibration and/or steering assist warning in the steer-
ing wheel if a lane departure occurs.
•
When the system senses a lane drift situation, the
left lane line turns solid yellow. At this time, steering
assist warning is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
System On (Gray Lines) Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Line) Lanes Sensed (Green Lines)
Lane Drift (Solid Yellow Line)
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
4
•
When the system senses the lane line is being
crossed, the left lane line changes from solid yellow
to flashing yellow (on/off). At this time, vibration is
applied to the steering wheel.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
NOTE:
•
The Active Lane Management system operates with
similar behavior for a right lane departure.
•
If the turn signal is activated, and the vehicle begins
to depart the lane at the same time the Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) system detects another vehicle in
the BSM zones, the system will provide a haptic
steering wheel vibration and/or steering assist
torque (if programmed in Uconnect Settings).
CHANGING ACTIVE LANE
MANAGEMENT STATUS
Configurable settings for the Active Lane Management
system are available within the Uconnect system
page 133.
Selectable Warning Types:
•
Vibration Only
•
Steering Assist Only
•
Vibration And Steering Assist
Other configurable settings for this system are for the
intensity of the vibration (hi/med/low), steering assist
warning (hi/med/low), and the warning zone sensitivity
(early/medium/late).
NOTE:
•
The system will not apply vibration and/or steering
assist to the steering wheel whenever a safety sys-
tem engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control
System, Electronic Stability Control, Forward Colli-
sion Warning, etc.).
•
The Blind Spot Monitoring system will be forced on
when the ALM system is enabled.
•
The ALM system will be suppressed when the Active
Driving Assist system (if equipped) is engaged.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see
an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your
vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed on the Navigation/
Multimedia radio display screen along with a caution
note to “Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear license plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with cam-
era delay turned off, the rear camera mode is exited
and the previous screen appears.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
1. Press the Controls button located on the bottom of
the Uconnect display.
2. Press the Back Up Camera button to turn the Rear
View Camera system on.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable
modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect system
page 133.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with cam-
era delay turned off, the rear camera mode is exited
and the previous screen appears. When the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay turned on,
the camera image will continue to be displayed for up
to 10 seconds unless the following conditions occur:
The vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
vehicle is shifted into PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is
placed in the OFF position, or the user presses the
touchscreen X button to exit out of the camera video
display.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its pro-
jected back up path based on the steering wheel posi-
tion. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center
of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Line)
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
hitch/receiver. Different colored zones indicate the dis-
tance to the rear of the vehicle. The following table
shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0-1ft(0-30cm)
Yellow 1ft-6.5ft(30cm-2m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or
greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You
are responsible for the safety of your surroundings
and must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
•
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/
her shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Zoom View
When the Rear View Camera image is being displayed,
and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h) while
in any gear, Zoom View is available. By pressing the
“magnifying glass” icon in the upper left of the display
screen, the image will zoom in to four times the stan-
dard view. Pressing the icon a second time will return
the view to the standard Back Up Camera display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay view
will display the standard Back Up Camera view. If the
vehicle is then returned to REVERSE gear from DRIVE,
the Zoom View selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the
selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle
speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until
the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and
speeds are at or above 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE:
•
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE,
and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph
(13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the icon
will appear gray.
•
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
visible.
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround View
Camera system that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the surroundings and Top View of your vehicle
whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or a
different view is selected through the touchscreen but-
tons. The Top View of the vehicle will show which doors
are open. The image will be displayed on the touch-
screen display along with a caution note “Check Entire
Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five
seconds, this note will disappear. The Surround View
Camera system is comprised of four sequential cam-
eras located in the front grille, rear liftgate and side
mirrors.
NOTE:
The Surround View Camera system has programmable
settings that may be selected through the Uconnect
system
page 133.
Press this button on the touchscreen to
enter the Surround View Camera menu in
the Uconnect system.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE,
the Rear View and Top View is the default view of the
system.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with cam-
era delay turned on, the camera image will continue to
be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the vehicle
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted
into PARK or the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
There is a touchscreen X button to disable the display
of the camera image.
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
4
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with cam-
era delay turned off, the Surround View Camera mode
is exited and the last known screen appears again.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle, including
the side view mirrors and its projected back up path
based on the steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear
of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances
for each zone:
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0-1ft(0-30cm)
Yellow 1ft-6.5ft(30cm-2m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or
greater)
Modes Of Operation
Manual activation of the Surround View Camera is
selected by pressing the Surround View Camera button
located in the Controls menu within the Uconnect
system.
Top View
The Top View will show in the Uconnect system with
Rear View or Front View in a split screen display. There
are integrated ParkSense arcs in the image at the front
and rear of the vehicle. The arcs will change color from
yellow to red corresponding the distance zones to the
oncoming object.
NOTE:
•
Front tires will be in image when the tires are turned.
•
Due to wide angle cameras in the mirrors, the image
will appear distorted.
•
Top View will show which doors are open.
•
Open front doors will cancel outside image.
•
Open liftgate will cancel rear image while in Top
View.
Rear View Plus Top View
This is the default view of the system in
REVERSE and is always paired with the Top
View of the vehicle with optional active
guidelines for the projected path when
enabled.
Rear Cross Path View
Pressing the Rear Cross Path button will give
the driver a wider angle view of the rear cam-
era system. The Top View will be disabled
when this is selected.
Front View Plus Top View
The Front View will show you what is immedi-
ately in front of the vehicle and is always
paired with the Top View of the vehicle.
Front Cross Path View
Pressing the Front Cross Path button will give
the driver a wider angle view of the front
camera system. The Top View will be dis-
abled when this is selected.
Rear View Camera
Pressing the Back Up Camera button will
provide a full screen rear view with Zoom
View.
NOTE:
If the Rear View Camera view was selected through the
Surround View Camera menu, exiting out of the Rear
View screen will return to the last known Surround View
screen. If the Back Up Camera was manually activated
through the Controls menu of the Uconnect system,
exiting out of the display screen will return to the Con-
trols menu.
Deactivation
The system can be deactivated under the following
conditions:
•
The speed of the vehicle is greater than 8 mph
(13 km/h).
•
The vehicle is shifted into PARK.
•
The vehicle is in any gear other than REVERSE and
the touchscreen X button is pressed.
•
The camera delay system is turned off manually
through the Uconnect Settings menu
page 133.
Surround View Camera View
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up
on the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
lenses.
•
If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see
an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Surround View Camera. Always check care-
fully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
the safety of your surroundings and must continue to
pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View should
only be used as a parking aid. The Surround View
camera is unable to view every obstacle or object
in your drive path.
•
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using Surround View to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is rec-
ommended that the driver look frequently over
his/her shoulder when using Surround View.
ZOOM VIEW
When the Rear View Camera image is being displayed,
and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h) while
in any gear selector position, Zoom View is available.
By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon in
the upper left of the display screen, the
image will zoom in to four times the standard
view.
Pressing the icon a second time will return
the view to the standard Back Up Camera
display.
When Zoom View is selected while the
vehicle is in REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the cam-
era delay view will display the standard Back Up Cam-
era view. If the vehicle is then returned to REVERSE
gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will automati-
cally resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the
selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle
speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until
the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and
speeds are at or above 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE:
•
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE,
and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph
(13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the icon
will appear gray.
•
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
visible.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors inside the
pipe seal the system.
1. Open the fuel filler door by pushing on the outer
edge of the fuel door.
Fuel Filler Door
Fuel Filler Pipe
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
4
2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe; the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while
refueling.
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel, and when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
4. Keep the nozzle in the filler for five seconds after
nozzle clicks to allow fuel to drain from the nozzle.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator
Light to turn on.
•
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver's side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), front and rear
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), and Vehicle Identifi-
cation Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number
is included on this label and indicates the Month, Day
and Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears
on the bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front
and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Total load
must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are
not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of
the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the
cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not
exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in
the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability do not necessarily increase the
vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label repre-
sents the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement
tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle
for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle
fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants
or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle
on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo
are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be deter-
mined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for
operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been
exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the
vehicle should then be determined separately to be
sure that the load is properly distributed over the front
and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the
GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been
exceeded but the total load is within the specified
GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or
rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight
limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low
and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and
the way the brakes operate.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose
control. Overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cover-
age, follow the requirements and recommendations in
this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do
not exceed the GVWR
page 124.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of
all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
ready for operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and
rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear
axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either
front or rear GAWR
page 124.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose con-
trol of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball
by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load
on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by
the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that can
be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer
tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associ-
ated with the telescoping motion to dampen any
unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a swaying
trailer and automatically applies individual wheel
brakes and/or reduces engine power to attempt to
eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball
or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These
kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow small and
medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A Weight-Distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturer's directions,
it provides for a more level ride, offering more consis-
tent steering and brake control thereby enhancing tow-
ing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway con-
trol also dampens sway caused by traffic and
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and
trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a Weight-
Distributing (load equalizing) Hitch are recommended
for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required
depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading
to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
requirements.
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
4
WARNING!
•
An improperly adjusted Weight-Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
formance, and could result in a collision.
•
Weight-Distributing systems may not be compat-
ible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec-
reational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
Engine/Transmission Model Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW
2.0L/8-Speed Auto 4WD 2,000 lb (907 kg) 200 lb (90 kg)
When towing a trailer, the technically permissible laden weight may be exceeded by not more than 10% or 220 lb (100 kg), whichever is lower provided that the operating
speed is restricted to 62 mph (100 km/h) or less.
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds and loads.
Towing limits quoted represent the maximum towing ability of the vehicle at its Gross Combined Mass to restart on a 12 percent gradient at sea level.
The performance and economy of all models will be reduced when used for towing.
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the front/rear axles of the vehicle:
•
The trailer tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed
options, must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the Tire And Loading Information
Placard located on the driver’s door pillar for the maxi-
mum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your
vehicle.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components, the following guidelines are
recommended.
CAUTION!
•
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
•
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in Scheduled Servicing
and the proper maintenance intervals
page 210.
When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR
ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as pos-
sible:
•
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to con-
trol. You could lose control of your vehicle and have
a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause
a loss of control, poor performance or damage to
brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus-
pension, chassis structure or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or
"chock" the trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
○ GVWR
○ GTW
○ GAWR
○ Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
Weight Distribution
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
4
Towing Requirements — Tires
•
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a com-
pact spare tire.
•
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
towing while using a full size spare tire.
•
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
•
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
•
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer.
•
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity
will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR
limits.
•
For further information page 236.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
•
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the
trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and
possible personal injury.
•
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped
with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an
electronic brake controller is not required.
•
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess
of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing, you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead
to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights
And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer con-
nector. Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
•
Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle (or any other device plugged into vehicle’s
electrical connectors) before launching a boat into
water.
•
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Ground
2—Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and backing
up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE (D) range when towing. The transmis-
sion controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent
shifting when towing. For increased engine braking on
steep downhill grades, select the LOW range.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
•
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
•
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disen-
gage until you can get back to cruising speed.
•
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads
to maximize fuel efficiency.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
TOWING CONDITION WHEELS OFF THE GROUND FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
REAR NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
FRONT OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL BEST METHOD OK
NOTE:
•
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
•
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is
enabled or disabled via the Customer Programmable Features in the Uconnect Settings.
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
4
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE (FWD)
MODELS
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a
tow dolly (front wheels off the ground) or vehicle trailer
(all four wheels off the ground). If using a tow dolly, fol-
low this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, follow-
ing the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the Electric Park Brake (EPB). Place the trans-
mission in PARK (P). Turn the engine off.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, follow-
ing the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
5. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do not
start the engine.
6. Press and hold the brake pedal.
7. Release the EPB.
8. Turn the ignition OFF, remove the key fob, and
release the brake pedal.
CAUTION!
•
Towing with the front wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
and remains released, while being towed.
•
Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The fascia/bumper face will be
damaged.
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
4X4 MODELS
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground,
or using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. This vehicle
may be towed on flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all
four wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DRIVING TIPS
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a nar-
rower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds
as conventional passenger cars any more than low-
slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily
in off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of con-
trol or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When To Use 4WD LOW Range
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain,
ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase
low-speed pulling power
page 92. This range
should be limited to extreme situations such as deep
snow, mud, or sand where additional low speed pulling
power is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph
(40 km/h) should be avoided when in 4WD LOW range.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
water, there are a number of precautions that must be
considered before entering the water:
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driv-
ing through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep
water to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-
off) avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or
the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing-water,
avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (22 cm). The flowing
water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to
sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are
downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 16 inches
(40.5 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
wave effects. Maximum speed in 16 inches (40.5 cm)
of water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
(Trailhawk only): Avoid driving in standing water deeper
than 19 inches (48 cm), and reduce speed appropri-
ately to minimize wave effects. Maximum speed in 19
inches (48 cm) of water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine, transmission, Power
Transfer Unit, and Rear Drive Module) to ensure they
have not been contaminated. Contaminated fluids and
lubricants (milky, foamy in appearance) should be
flushed/changed as soon as possible to prevent com-
ponent damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the 4WD system to the appropriate ter-
rain mode, using 4WD LOW if necessary
page 92.
Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain
headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels
and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads
because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE:
Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the condi-
tions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the 4WD System to 4WD LOW. Use
FIRST gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
NOTE:
Brakes should be applied at increased slippage, but
before coming to a stop to avoid digging into the loose
surface and rendering the operator of the vehicle
stuck/immobile.
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
immediately apply the brakes. Once stopped, shift to
REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the com-
pression braking of the engine to help regulate your
speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle
speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding
the tires.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in tipping
and rolling the vehicle. Always back straight down a
hill in REVERSE gear carefully. Never back down a hill
in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
NOTE:
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill - drive
straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by
turning the front wheels slowly left and right. This may
provide a fresh traction into the surface and may pro-
vide traction to complete the climb.
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
4
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the 4WD Sys-
tem to 4WD LOW range or select Hill Descent Control
(if equipped)
page 155. Let the vehicle go slowly
down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine
compression drag. This will permit you to control the
vehicle speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis-
sion whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle
than does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it
is always a good idea to check for damage.
•
Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension,
and exhaust system for damage.
•
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean
as required.
•
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly
on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and
suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque
to the values specified in the Service Manual.
•
Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide dam-
age to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
•
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes
inspected and cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the braking system
may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking
performance. Full braking power may not be available
to prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, inspect and clean the brak-
ing components as soon as possible.
•
Impacted material can cause wheel imbalance.
Freeing the wheels of impacted material will likely
rectify imbalance condition.
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 5/5 NAV
With 10.1-inch Display, refer to your Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes
only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Depending on applicability, your vehicle may be able to
send or receive information from a wired or wireless
network. This information allows systems and features
in your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communica-
tions. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve
over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. As
always, if you experience unusual behavior, contact an
authorized dealer immediately,
page 256, or refer
to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual for addi-
tional contact information.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software)
is installed.
WARNING!
•
ONLY insert trusted devices/components into your
vehicle. Media of unknown origin could possibly
contain malicious software, and if installed in your
vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
•
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, contact an authorized dealer
immediately.
NOTE:
To help further improve user experience, features, sta-
bility, etc., and minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should routinely check
www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn
about available Uconnect software updates.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located
in the center of the instrument panel. These buttons
allow you to access and change Programmable Fea-
tures. Many features can vary by vehicle and packages.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the instru-
ment panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/ENTER con-
trol knob below and to the right of the screen. Turn the
control knob to scroll through menus and change set-
tings. Push the center of the control knob one or more
times to select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and
MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn
off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap
the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or
certain option on the Uconnect system.
Push and hold the Power button on the radio’s face-
plate for a minimum of 15 seconds to reset the radio.
133
5
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE
FEATURES
Press the Vehicle button, then press the Settings tab on
the top of the touchscreen. In this menu, the Uconnect
system allows you to access all of the available pro-
grammable features.
NOTE:
•
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
•
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred setting
option until a check mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once the set-
ting is complete, press the Vehicle button to exit to the
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
My Profile
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster Display. The available languages are
English, Français, and Español.
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display Buttons On The
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
134 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
This setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”. “Manual” allows for more customization with the
radio display.
Display Brightness Daytime
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when it is daytime. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to
“Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness Nighttime
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when it is nighttime. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to
“Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Theme Mode
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options are “Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to
show themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto” changes the theme with the headlights.
Units
This setting will allow you to customize the units for “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption”
(MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measure-
ment independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be “Off” for this setting to be avail-
able. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word
This setting will allow you to set the system “Wake Up” word. The available options are “Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey,
Jeep®”.
Voice Barge-in This setting will allow Voice Barge-in to be turned on or off.
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List to be shown on or off.
Navigation Settings
This setting will redirect to the list of Navigation settings. Refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual for further
information.
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated
Steering Wheel
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or heated steering wheel when the vehicle is
remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will
only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems when-
ever the vehicle is started.
Radio Off Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off. When any door is opened, the elec-
tronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0 min” and “20 min”.
MULTIMEDIA 135
5
Setting Name Description
Radio Off With Door This setting will allow you to determine if the radio shuts off when any of the doors are opened.
Audio Settings This setting will open the submenu, containing the audio settings
page 146.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
App Drawer Unfavoritings Pop-ups This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
New Text Message Pop-ups This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages. Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Missed Calls Message This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Pop-ups This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the touchscreen. The
available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster Display. The available languages are
English, Français, and Español.
Display Mode This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the
system automatically adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the
display.
Display Brightness Daytime This setting will allow you to set the brightness when it is daytime. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to
“Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
136 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Display Brightness Nighttime This setting will allow you to set the brightness when it is nighttime. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to
“Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Theme Mode This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options are “Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to
show themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto” changes the theme with the headlights.
Units This setting will allow you to change the units to “US”, “Metric”, or “Custom”. The available options within Custom are
“Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pres-
sure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Safety/Driving Assistance
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These options will differ
depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the
available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning — Located In Automatic
Emergency Braking Submenu
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system on or off. The “Off” setting will deactivate the FCW sys-
tem. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active
Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — Located In
Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have
the FCW system signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have
the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal when an
object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
MULTIMEDIA 137
5
Setting Name Description
Pedestrian Emergency Braking — Located In Auto-
matic Emergency Braking Submenu
This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system on or off.
Lane Management — Located In Active Lane
Management
This setting will activate the system that will alert the driver when a lane departure is detected. If selected, steering assist
can be provided. The available options are “Vibration Only”, “Steering Assist Only”, and “Vibration + Steering Assist”.
Lane Warning — Located In Active Lane
Management
This setting will set the warning type for Active Lane Management. The available options are “Early”, “Medium”, and
“Late”.
Vibration Strength — Located In Active Lane
Management
This setting will set the strength of the steering wheel vibration. The available options are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Steering Assist Strength — Located In Active Lane
Management
This setting will set the strength of the steering wheel pull when a lane departure is detected. The available options are
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
LaneSense Warning — Located In LaneSense
submenu
This setting will set the warning type for LaneSense. The available options are “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”.
LaneSense Strength — Located In LaneSense
submenu
This setting will set the strength of the LaneSense system. The available options are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
ParkSense This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected. The “Sound Only” setting will provide
an audible chime when an object is detected. The “Sound and Display” setting will provide both an audible chime and a
visual display when an object is detected.
Front ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will provide braking assistance if the Rear ParkSense system senses a collision with an object.
Active ParkSense Mode This setting will control Active ParkSense functionality between fully autonomous parking and semi-autonomous parking.
The available options are “Full Auto” and “Steering Only”.
Active ParkSense Proximity Chime This setting will turn the Active ParkSense Proximity Chimes on or off. This setting in only available when Active ParkSense
Mode is set to “Full Auto”.
Blind Spot Alert This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in the vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting
will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights
& Chime” setting will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Traffic Sign Assist This setting will turn Traffic Sign Assist on or off.
Traffic Sign Assist Warning This setting will allow you to set the warning type related to the traffic sign. The available options are “Off”, “Visual”, and
“Visual + Chime”.
138 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
New Speed Zone Indication This setting will allow you to set if the system will warn you that the speed limit has changed in an area. The available
options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
Drowsy Driver Alert This setting will monitor the driver’s driving habits and warn you of any changes, indicating that the driver may be drowsy.
The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Highway Assist Steering Wheel Vibration This setting will vibrate the steering wheel when a lane departure is detected. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Side Distance Warning This setting will turn the Side Distance Warning on or off and set how the system will communicate with the user. The “Off”
setting will deactivate the system. The “Sound” setting will provide an audible chime to the user. The “Sound And Display”
setting will provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
Rear Seat Alert When this setting is turned on and the rear doors are opened while the engine is running, or if the engine is turned on
within 10 minutes of the door opening, a message will appear to check the rear seat when the vehicle is powered OFF.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
Clock & Date
When the Clock & Date button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will control the time via the GPS location.
Set Time Hours This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting
will increase the hours. The “-” setting will decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “+” set-
ting will increase the minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Time Format This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available.
The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format. You
will also be able to adjust the clock.
Set Date This setting will allow you to set the date.
MULTIMEDIA 139
5
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or smart-
phone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb All This setting will open the Do Not Disturb All settings menu. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Enable Two Active Phones This setting will enable or disable two active phones within the vehicle. The setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the system’s voice to either “Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. The available options are “Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey,
Jeep®”.
Voice Barge-In This setting allows you to respond to a Voice Response before the statement is completed by the system. The available
options are “On” and “Off”.
140 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Show Command List This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will always show the Command List. The
“With Help” setting will show the Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never”
setting will turn the Command List off.
Navigation
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can change which
icons display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay This setting will add a delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.
Surround View Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the Surround View Camera when shifting out of REVERSE.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Surround View Camera Guidelines on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 141
5
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
•
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle
purchase.
•
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Sensitivity This setting will allow you to set the sensitivity of the headlights depending on the amount of visible light. The greater the
sensitivity set, the less the external light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting on level 3 at sunset, the
headlights turn on earlier than in levels 1 and 2). The available levels are “Level 1: Minimum Sensitivity”, “Level 2:
Medium Sensitivity”, and “Level 3: Maximum Sensitivity”.
Headlight Off Delay This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off.
The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The
available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
142 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Greeting Lights This setting will turn the Greeting Lights on or off.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Cornering Lights When this setting is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn signal indicators are on, a light (incor-
porated in the fog light) will turn on, on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.
Headlight Dip This setting will lower the headlights when driving on the opposite side of the road. The available options are “On” and
“Off”.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Brakes
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service This setting will allow you to retract the brakes for servicing.
MULTIMEDIA 143
5
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn
when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The
“2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed to unlock all the doors. The
“Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will
unlock all doors on the first push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on or off.
Power Liftgate Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the power liftgate is raising or lowering. Selectable options are “On” and
“Off”.
Hands-Free Power Liftgate
This setting will use hands-free technology to automatically open or close the power liftgate. Selectable options are “On”
and “Off”.
Setting Name Description
Auto Door Locks This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the vehicle reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
144 MULTIMEDIA
Seats & Comfort
When the Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has been activated
or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated steering wheel when the vehicle is
remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will
only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems when-
ever the vehicle is started.
Key Off Options
When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only activate when the ignition is
set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Radio Off Delay This setting will keep the radio running after the engine is turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deacti-
vate. The available settings are “0 min” and “20 min”.
Radio Off With Door This setting will shut the radio off when the door is opened. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Headlight Off Delay This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on after the vehicle has been turned off. The
“+” will increase the amount of time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
MULTIMEDIA 145
5
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within
the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon
can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the volume will increase more as the vehicle
speeds up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Auto-On Radio This setting will automatically turn the radio on when the vehicle is started. The available settings are “Off”, “On”, and
“Recall Last”. With Recall Last, the system resumes the previous task before vehicle shut off.
Radio off With Door This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the Radio Off Delay time is reached. The available set-
tings are “On” and “Off”.
Loudness This setting improves the sound quality at lower volumes. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Volume Adjustment This setting will allow you to set the audio volume levels for each option (Media, Phone, Navigation, etc.). You can set the
volume between 0 and 38.
146 MULTIMEDIA
Notifications
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Notification Sounds This setting will turn off the Notification chime that plays when a new notification is sent. The options are “On” and “Off”.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Favorited Pop-Up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Unfavorited Pop-Up on or off.
New Text Message Pop-Ups This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of any connected phone on or off.
Missed Calls Message This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any connected phone on or off.
Navigation Pop-Ups This setting turns receiving/storing predictive Navigation Pop-Ups on or off.
SiriusXM® Setup
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used to skip spe-
cific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
•
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
•
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
SiriusXM® Account, Profile, And Settings This setting will redirect you to the SiriusXM® settings menu within the SiriusXM® menu.
Block Explicit This setting will skip over content labeled as explicit. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
MULTIMEDIA 147
5
Software Updates
When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the setting related to updating the Uconnect software.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Downloads over Wi-Fi This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable options for the setting are “On” and “Off”.
System Information
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Licenses This will display the software licensing information screen.
148 MULTIMEDIA
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings. These settings can
clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restart Radio This setting will reboot the radio.
Reset Apps Drawer To Default Order This setting will return the apps drawer to the default order. The available options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button
can also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Restore Apps This setting will delete all of the installed apps if there is an issue with using or installing an app. The available options are
“Back” and “Next”.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
Clear Personal Data This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from the system, including Bluetooth®
devices and presets.
NOTE:
Performing this function may take several minutes to complete.
Reset Wi-Fi Password For Projection This setting will allow you to reset the vehicle’s Wi-Fi password for smartphone projection. The available options are “Yes”
and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Factory Reset This setting will restore the radio to its factory default settings.
MULTIMEDIA 149
5
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the
rear surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine
o’clock positions.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the
rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the
bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the right-hand control’s center button will make
the radio switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left-hand con-
trol is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation
in each mode:
RADIO OPERATION
Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the next
available station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will seek down for the next available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
MEDIA MODE
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®).
Pushing the bottom of the switch once goes to the
beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of
the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the
current track begins to play.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance
from your radio. This condition may be lessened or
eliminated by repositioning the mobile phone within the
vehicle. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If
your radio performance does not satisfactorily improve
from repositioning the mobile phone, it is recom-
mended that the volume be turned down or off during
mobile phone operation when not using the Uconnect
system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
INFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure
limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in
such a manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or
further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recom-
mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scien-
tific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in
some situations or environments, such as aboard air-
planes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encour-
aged to ask for authorization before turning on the wire-
less radio
page 259.
Remote Sound System Controls
150 MULTIMEDIA
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brak-
ing performance under various driving conditions. The
system automatically prevents wheel lock and
enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the system
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal charac-
teristics when the ABS activates:
•
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (which you may
continue to hear for a short time after the stop)
•
Brake pedal pulsations
•
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the
stop
The ABS is designed to function optimally with the Origi-
nal Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification
may result in degraded ABS performance.
WARNING!
•
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output radio
transmitting equipment. This interference can
cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability.
Installation of such equipment should be per-
formed by qualified professionals.
•
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow
down or stop.
•
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
•
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
•
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous man-
ner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the igni-
tion is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is
on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should
be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits
of Anti-lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
REAR SEAT REMINDER ALERT
(RSRA)
RSRA alerts you of the possible presence of an object,
passenger, or pet in the rear seats through a visual and
auditory notification. RSRA does not directly detect
objects, passengers, or pets in the rear seats. The sys-
tem will activate automatically if a rear door was
opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being placed
in the ON/RUN position. When the previous conditions
are met, RSRA displays the message “Check Rear Seat”
on the instrument cluster display and sounds an audi-
tory alert upon the driver placing the ignition in the OFF
position to exit the vehicle.
151
6
WARNING!
•
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a com-
plete stop, then shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and apply the parking brake.
•
Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in
the OFF position, key fob is removed from the
vehicle and vehicle is locked.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL
(EBC) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System
(BAS), Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Elec-
tronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction Control Sys-
tem (TCS). These systems work together to enhance
both vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Dynamic Steer-
ing Torque (DST), Hill Descent Control (HDC), Rain
Brake Support (RBS), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), and/or
Trailer Sway Control (TSC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by
sensing the rate and amount of brake application and
then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can
help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply con-
tinuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence
(do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal
pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the
brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplan-
ing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous man-
ner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the
safety of others.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is
not functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
DST is a feature of the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
and Electric Power Steering (EPS) modules that pro-
vides torque at the steering wheel for certain driving
conditions in which the ESC module is detecting vehicle
instability. The torque that the steering wheel receives
is only meant to help the driver realize optimal steering
behavior in order to reach/maintain vehicle stability.
The only notification the driver receives that the feature
is active is the torque applied to the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver realize
the correct course of action through small torques on
the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of
the DST feature is highly dependent on the driver’s sen-
sitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is
very important to realize that this feature will not steer
the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for
steering the vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking torque
between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent over-
slip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the front
axle.
152 SAFETY
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for dangerous wheel lift
by monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the
rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s
speed are sufficient to potentially dangerous cause
wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate brake and
may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance
that dangerous wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of dangerous wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot pre-
vent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those that
involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or
other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dan-
gerous manner which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to coun-
teract the these conditions. Engine power may also be
reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
•
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to
the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteract-
ing the oversteer or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be
sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
WARNING!
•
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inap-
propriate driver input for the conditions. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to
the steering system, suspension, braking system,
tire type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and
unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor-
mance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When-
ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in
this mode. This mode should be used for most driving
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used
for specific reasons as noted in the following
paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for acti-
vation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally
allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
ESC OFF button, located below the radio. The ESC OFF
Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again,
momentarily push the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will turn off.
SAFETY 153
6
NOTE:
When driving with snow chains, or when starting off in
deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to allow
more wheel spin. This can be accomplished by momen-
tarily pushing the ESC OFF button to enter “Partial Off”
mode. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is
overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing
the ESC OFF button. This may be done while the vehicle
is in motion.
WARNING!
•
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, except for the limited slip feature described
in the TCS section, has been disabled and the ESC
OFF Indicator Light will be illuminated. When in
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is
reduced.
•
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
Full Off (Four-Wheel Drive Models Only)
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
when ESC stability features could inhibit vehicle maneu-
verability due to trail conditions. This mode is entered
by pushing and holding the ESC OFF button for five sec-
onds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is
running. After five seconds, the ESC OFF Indicator Light
will illuminate and the “ESC OFF” message will appear
in the instrument cluster display.
In this mode, ESC and TCS, except for the Brake Limited
Differential (BLD) feature described in the TCS section,
are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of
40 mph (64 km/h). At 40 mph (64 km/h), the system
returns to “Partial Off” mode. TCS remains off. When
the vehicle speed drops below 30 mph (48 km/h), the
ESC system shuts off. ESC is deactivated at low vehicle
speeds so that it will not interfere with off-road driving.
However, ESC function returns to provide the stability
feature at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h). The ESC
OFF Indicator Light will always be illuminated when ESC
is off.
To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF
button. This will restore the “ESC On” mode of
operation.
NOTE:
The “ESC OFF” message will display and an audible
chime will sound when the gear selector is placed into
the PARK position from any other position, and then
moved out of the PARK position. This will occur even if
the message was previously cleared.
WARNING!
In the "Full Off" mode, the engine torque reduction
and stability features are disabled. In an emergency
evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to
assist in maintaining stability. “Full Off” mode is
intended for off-highway or off-road use only.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON mode.
It should go out with the engine running. If
the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes
on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction
has been detected in the ESC system. If this light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle
has been driven several miles (km) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as
soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and
corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts to
flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC sys-
tem becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when Traction Control Sys-
tem (TCS) is active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as pos-
sible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
NOTE:
•
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily
each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
•
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion, the ESC system will be on even if it was turned
off previously.
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
154 SAFETY
Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) —
If Equipped
The ESS activates the hazard lights at a faster than nor-
mal speed when heavy brake pressure is applied. ESS
will only activate when the speed is above 31 mph
(50 km/h). The ESS operates independently of other
lamps, and will turn on and off automatically. This indi-
cates to others that the vehicle is stopping quickly.
NOTE:
•
A warning light will illuminate within the instrument
cluster to inform the driver that the ESS feature has
been activated.
•
When towing a trailer, ESS will also activate the rear
indicator lights of the trailer.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
Hill Descent Control (HDC) is intended for low speed
off-road driving while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains
vehicle speed while descending hills during various
driving situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by
actively controlling the brakes.
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overrid-
ing with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, located in
front of the gear selector. The following conditions must
also be met to enable HDC:
•
The driveline is in 4WD Low.
•
The vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
•
The Electric Park Brake (EPB) is released.
•
The driver’s door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled, it will activate automatically if
driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude (greater
than approximately 8%). The set speed for HDC is
selectable by the driver and can be adjusted within the
thresholds by using throttle or brake application.
Driver Override:
The driver may override HDC activation speed with
throttle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of
the following conditions occur:
•
Driver overrides HDC set speed with a speed
exceeding 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains below
25 mph (40 km/h).
•
Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magni-
tude (less than approximately 8%), is on level
ground, or is on an uphill grade.
•
Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the fol-
lowing conditions occur:
•
The driver pushes the HDC switch.
•
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
•
The driver’s door opens.
•
The vehicle is driven greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h) (HDC exits immediately.)
Feedback To The Driver:
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
switch has an LED, which offers feedback to the driver
about the state HDC is in.
•
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This
is the normal operating condition for HDC.
•
The switch lamp will flash for several seconds then
extinguish when the driver pushes the HDC switch
when enable conditions have not been met.
The HDC switch is located within the Selec-Terrain knob
in the upper right position.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must
remain attentive to the driving conditions and is
responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete
stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake
while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold
the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver does
not apply the throttle before this time expires, the sys-
tem will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA
to activate:
•
The feature must be enabled.
•
The vehicle must be stopped.
•
The parking brake must be off.
•
The driver’s door must be closed.
SAFETY 155
6
•
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
•
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direc-
tion (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear;
vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
•
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the transmis-
sion is in PARK or NEUTRAL.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
DISABLING AND ENABLING HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
•
If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster dis-
play, see
page 65 for further information.
•
If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, see
page 133 for further information.
TOWING WITH HSA
Hill Start Assist (HSA) will also provide assistance to
mitigate roll back while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
•
If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deacti-
vated with the brake switch. If so, there may not be
enough brake pressure to hold both the vehicle
and the trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is
released. In order to avoid rolling down an incline
while resuming acceleration, manually activate the
trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure
prior to releasing the brake pedal.
•
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the park-
ing brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be
certain to place the transmission in PARK.
•
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a col-
lision or serious personal injury.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet condi-
tions. It will periodically apply a small amount of brake
pressure to remove any water buildup on the front
brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers
are in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake Support is
active, there is no notification to the driver and no
driver interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking
during emergency braking situations. It anticipates
when an emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the
driver. The Electronic Brake Controller (EBC) system will
prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin for each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce vehicle power to provide enhanced acceleration
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differen-
tial (BLD) functions similarly to a limited slip differential
and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one
wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other,
the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel.
This will allow more vehicle torque to be applied to the
wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even
if TCS and ESC are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-
sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become
active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer
is recognized.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use
caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer
tongue weight recommendations
page 125.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the
trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC sys-
tem is in the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
156 SAFETY
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
IF EQUIPPED
The BSM system uses two radar sensors, located inside
the rear fascia/bumper, to detect highway licensable
vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that
enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of
the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear and enters standby mode when the
vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width, 12 ft (3.8 m), on both sides of the vehicle. The
zone length starts at the outside mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper
of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection
zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle
speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher
and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
•
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
•
The BSM system will automatically disable when a
trailer is detected. If the attached trailer is not
detected, the system detection zone DOES NOT
change. Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane
is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before mak-
ing a lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e.,
bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side
of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM Warning
Light remaining illuminated the entire time the
vehicle is in a forward gear. It may be necessary to
deactivate the BSM system manually to avoid mis-
detection
page 133.
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice, mud,
or other road contaminations accumulate on the rear
fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are located. The
system may also detect blockage if the vehicle is oper-
ated in areas with extremely low radar returns such as a
desert or parallel to a large elevation drop. If blockage is
detected, a “Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable, Sensor
Blocked” message will display in the cluster, both mirror
lights will illuminate, and BSM and RCP alerts will not
occur. This is normal operation. The system will automati-
cally recover and resume function when the condition
clears or when an ignition cycle occurs. To minimize sys-
tem blockage, do not block the area of the rear fascia/
bumper where the radar sensors are located with foreign
objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.) and keep it
clear of road contaminations.
The BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object
when enabled. If the turn signal is then activated, and it
corresponds to an alert present on that side of the
vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded when
chimes are enabled. In addition to the audible alert the
radio (if on) will also be muted during the chime event
page 159.
Rear Detection Zones
Radar Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
Warning Light Location
SAFETY 157
6
As part of the Active Lane Management system, if the
vehicle begins to drift into an adjacent lane that has an
active LED indication, the LED will flash if steering
torque is provided to guide the vehicle back to the cen-
ter of the lane
page 118.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (side, rear, front) while driv-
ing to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will
issue an alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with a
relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 10 mph (16 km/h), the warning light will be
illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two
vehicles is greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), the warning
light may not illuminate.
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foli-
age, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may
alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adja-
cent lanes
page 259.
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
Opposing Traffic
158 SAFETY
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of
the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is
exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of
the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected,
alert the driver.
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side
of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R), the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume anytime
the system is enabled regardless of the chime setting.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the sen-
sors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver
detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation.
Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when
using RCP. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot Alert has three selectable modes of opera-
tion that are available in the Uconnect system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only (Default Setting)
When operating in Lights Only mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio is muted for the
duration of the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If
the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to
an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
detected object are present on the same side at the
same time, both the visual and audible alerts will be
issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on)
will also be muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio volume is reduced. Turn/hazard
signal status is ignored; the RCP state always requests
the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
Blocked Sensor
If the system detects degraded performance due to
contamination or foreign objects, a message will warn
you of a blocked sensor and the warning indicators in
RCP Detection Zones
SAFETY 159
6
side view mirrors will be illuminated. The warning indi-
cators will remain illuminated until blockage clearing
conditions are met. First clear the fascia/bumper area
around the sensors of the blockage. After removing the
blockage, reset the system by cycling the ignition from
ON to OFF and then back ON.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING
(FCW) WITH MITIGATION —
IF EQUIPPED
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument cluster
display), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver
when it detects a potential frontal collision. The warn-
ings and limited braking are intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the
potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these pro-
gressive warnings, then the system will provide a lim-
ited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system deter-
mines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 39 mph (62 km/h), the system
may provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate
the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision
Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle com-
pletely, the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for
two seconds and then release the brakes.
When the system determines a collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated
page 259.
NOTE:
•
The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
•
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other
than vehicles such as guardrails or sign posts based
on the course prediction. This is expected and is a
part of normal FCW activation and functionality.
•
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking
events within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion
of FCW will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
•
The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to
the surroundings.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the respon-
sibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning
could lead to serious injury or death.
FCW Settings
The Forward Collision menu setting is located in the
Uconnect Settings
page 133.
NOTE:
The default status of FCW is “Full On,” this allows the
system to provide warning and autonomous braking in
the event of a potential frontal collision.
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” prevents
the system from providing autonomous braking, or addi-
tional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” deactivates the sys-
tem, so no warning or autonomous braking will be avail-
able in case of a possible collision.
NOTE:
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one igni-
tion cycle to the next. If the system is turned off, it will
remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
FCW Message
160 SAFETY
Changing FCW Sensitivity And Operating
Status
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are pro-
grammable through the Uconnect system
page 133.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium” setting
and the system status is “Warning & Braking”. This
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible colli-
sion with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warn-
ings and it applies autonomous braking.
By changing the FCW status setting to "Far", the system
provides possible collision warnings on objects farther
away. This results in earlier warnings and provides the
most reaction time to avoid possible collisions.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
By changing the FCW status setting to "Near", the sys-
tem provides possible collision warnings on objects
closer to the vehicle. This results in later warnings and
provides less reaction time than the "Far" and "Medium"
settings, which allows for a more dynamic driving
experience.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of
FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
NOTE:
•
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” pre-
vents the system from providing limited active brak-
ing, or additional brake support if the driver is not
braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal
collision, but maintains the audible and visual
warnings.
•
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the sys-
tem from providing autonomous braking, or addi-
tional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal
collision.
•
The system will retain the last setting selected by
the driver after ignition shut down.
•
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in
the path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are
far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with
the same or higher rates of speed.
•
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display reads “FCW Limited
Functionality” or “FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
driveable under normal conditions, the active braking
may not be fully available. Once the condition that lim-
ited the system performance is no longer present, the
system will return to its full performance state. If the
problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster dis-
play reads “FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there is
an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is still
driveable under normal conditions, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) —
If Equipped
PEB is a subsystem of the Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) system which provides the driver with audible
warnings and visual warnings, in the instrument cluster
display. It may apply limited automatic braking when it
detects a potential frontal collision with a
pedestrian/cyclist.
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 39 mph
(62 km/h), the system may provide maximum braking
to mitigate the potential collision with a pedestrian/
cyclist. If the PEB event stops the vehicle completely,
the system will hold the vehicle at a standstill for two
seconds and then release the brakes. When the system
determines a collision with the pedestrian/cyclist in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated.
The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph
(5 km/h).
PEB Message
SAFETY 161
6
WARNING!
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not intended
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can PEB detect
every type of potential collision with a pedestrian/
cyclist. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a
collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and
steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to
serious injury or death.
Turning PEB On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows the sys-
tem to warn you of a possible frontal collision with the
pedestrian/cyclist.
The PEB button is located in the Uconnect display in the
Controls settings
page 133.
To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian Emer-
gency Braking OFF button.
To turn the PEB system back on, push the Warning
Active Braking button.
Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates the sys-
tem, so no warning or active braking will be available in
case of a possible frontal collision with the
pedestrian/cyclist.
NOTE:
The PEB system will retain the last setting selected by
the driver after ignition shut down. The system will not
reset to the default setting when the vehicle is
restarted.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the vehicle recommended cold placard
pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approxi-
mately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature decreases,
the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should
always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This
is normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
For more information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires, see
page 236.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire. The TPMS
will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as
long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until
the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold
placard pressure.
NOTE:
Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System Warning Light) illuminates, you must
increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold
placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing System Warning Light to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off once
the system receives the updated tire pressures. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pres-
sure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is
68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi
(193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi
(165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to turn on
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light.
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise
to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System Warning Light will still be on. In
this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will turn off only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value
page 259.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light off.
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not of the
(Continued)
162 SAFETY
CAUTION!
same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS sensor is
not designed for use on aftermarket wheels and
may contribute to a poor overall system perfor-
mance or sensor damage. Customers are encour-
aged to use Original Equipment Manufacturer
(OEM) wheels to ensure proper TPMS feature
operation.
•
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
•
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will pre-
vent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a
tire failure or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
tain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire
pressure gauge, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light.
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres-
sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pres-
sure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses wire-
less technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sen-
sors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted
to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire pres-
sure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver module
•
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
•
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which will display in the instrument cluster display
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low
Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will illuminate in the instru-
ment cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a "Tire Low" message, an “Inflate to XX” mes-
sage, and a graphic showing the pressure values of
each tire with the low tire pressure values highlighted
or in a different color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those high-
lighted or in a different color in the instrument cluster
display graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value, as shown in the “Inflate to XX”
message. Once the system receives the updated tire
pressures, the system will automatically update, the
pressure values in the graphic display in the instrument
cluster will stop being highlighted or return to their origi-
nal color, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to
turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
off.The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 min-
utes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low Pressure Warning
SAFETY 163
6
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system
fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the instru-
ment cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" mes-
sage for a minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure value to indicate
which sensor is not being received.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message will no longer display, and a
pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A
system fault can occur due to any of the following:
•
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors
•
Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals
•
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings
•
Using tire chains on the vehicle
•
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors
Vehicles With Compact Spare Or Non-Matching Full
Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size
does not have a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the compact or non-matching full size
spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure
below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next
ignition key cycle, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem Warning Light will remain on and a chime will
sound. In addition, the graphic in the instrument
cluster will still display a different color or high-
lighted pressure value and the “Inflate to XX”
message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition,
the instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster will dis-
play a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five
seconds and then display dashes (--) in place of the
pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact
spare or non-matching full size, the TPMS will
update automatically. In addition, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off and
the graphic in the instrument cluster will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (--), as long as
no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire
assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such as
when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on
your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensors. Then,
drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument
cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” mes-
sage and then display dashes (--) in place of the pres-
sure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The instru-
ment cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message and then display pressure values in place of
the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the "SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer be displayed as
long as no system fault exists.
164 SAFETY
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
FEATURES
•
Seat Belt Systems
•
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
•
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may
be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly must be secured in the appropri-
ate child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in
a rear seating position
page 181.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use
the proper child restraint
page 181.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front air
bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs,
the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, see
page 256 for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor
driver and could cause a collision that includes you.
This can happen far away from home or on your own
street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibil-
ity of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking
the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle
should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder
System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition switch
is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is
first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will sig-
nal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front
seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front pas-
senger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The out-
board front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when
an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
SAFETY 165
6
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passen-
ger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder
Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the
BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts
are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to
buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is
traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin
until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoc-
cupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or
other items are placed on the outboard front passenger
seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat
(if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or out-
board front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the
driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the
seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some col-
lisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
•
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
•
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your
seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe,
too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into
one another in a collision, hurting one another
badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt
for more than one person, no matter what their
size.
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
(Continued)
166 SAFETY
WARNING!
•
A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle,
take it to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
•
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
•
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
•
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so
that your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
•
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
•
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a colli-
sion and leave you with no protection. Inspect the
seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or
(Continued)
WARNING!
modify the seat belt system. If your vehicle is
involved in a collision, or if you have questions
regarding seat belt or retractor conditions, take
your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
for inspection.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating
Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the
front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for
vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch
plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
belt to go around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click”.
4.
Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
SAFETY 167
6
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the
latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt webbing
180 degrees to create a fold that begins immedi-
ately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded web-
bing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the
top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer
twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the
top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or
downward to position the seat belt away from your
neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release
the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position
that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will pre-
fer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and
if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoul-
der belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the
upward position without pushing or squeezing the
release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is
latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
•
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is com-
fortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
•
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
•
Always make all seat belt height adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
Second Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions
The second row center seat belt may feature a seat belt
with a mini-latch plate and buckle. The mini-latch plate
and buckle (if equipped) should remain connected at all
times. If the mini-latch plate and buckle become dis-
connected, they must be properly reconnected prior to
the rear center seat belt being used by an occupant.
1. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over
the seat.
Adjustable Anchorage
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
168 SAFETY
2. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a
“click.”
3. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to
go around your lap.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
5. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on
the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
6. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
7. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
8. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-
buckle, insert the regular latch plate into the center
red slot on the mini-buckle.
WARNING!
•
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not
properly connected when the seat belt is used by
an occupant, the seat belt will not be able to pro-
vide proper restraint and will increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
•
When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the pre-
ceding procedure to detach the mini-latch plate
and mini-buckle, untwist the webbing, and reat-
tach the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable
upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its
lowest position, an authorized dealer can provide you
with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender
Inserting Mini-Latch Plate Into Mini-Buckle
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
SAFETY 169
6
should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for
a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
•
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
•
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the rec-
ommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove
slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the
seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a
collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner
or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further
reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The
seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractors (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint sys-
tem
page 187.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Auto-
matic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
170 SAFETY
installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indi-
cates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking
Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emer-
gency) locking mode.
WARNING!
•
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
•
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
•
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or chil-
dren who are using booster seats. The locked
mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may
be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with the electrical Air Bag System Compo-
nents. Your vehicle may be equipped with the following
Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Air Bag Warning Light
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Knee Impact Bolsters
•
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
•
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
•
Supplemental Side Air Bags
•
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Seat Belt Pretensioners
•
Seat Track Position Sensors
•
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses
power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight sec-
onds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air
Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously.
A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes
on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
SAFETY 171
6
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four
to eight-second interval.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Control-
ler (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air
bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemen-
tal Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the
instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a
single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a fault has
been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immedi-
ately
page 74.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts
for both the driver and front passenger. The front air
bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint sys-
tems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the center
of the steering wheel. The passenger front air bag is
mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove com-
partment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
WARNING!
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your
arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument
panel.
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system pro-
vides output appropriate to the severity and type of col-
lision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Control-
ler (ORC), which may receive information from the front
impact sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during
an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low
energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher
energy output is used for more severe collisions.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
172 SAFETY
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust
the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based
upon seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (OCS) that is designed
to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output
appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
WARNING!
•
No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
•
Do not put anything on or around the air bag cov-
ers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some col-
lisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional pro-
tection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags
are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear,
side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not
deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for example,
some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location
of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves
are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag
should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects a
collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the infla-
tor units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated
to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper pas-
senger side of the instrument panel separate and fold
out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size.
The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes
to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly
deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of a
Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is
designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight, as
determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of
the following:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
•
Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is
located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The
OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine the front
passenger’s most probable classification. The OCM
communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC
may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag deployment based on occupant
classification. In order for the OCS to operate as
designed, it is important for the front passenger to be
seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the infla-
tion rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the
OCS estimates that:
•
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects on it; or
•
The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas-
senger, including a child; or
SAFETY 173
6
•
The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-
facing child restraint; or
•
The front passenger is not properly seated or his or
her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of
time.
Front Passenger Seat
Occupant Status
Front Passenger Air
Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power
deployment
Child, including a child in
a forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat*
Reduced-power deploy-
ment OR Full-power
deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power
deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power
deployment
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat and never install a child restraint sys-
tem, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front
passenger seat.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
•
Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most prob-
able classification. The OCS estimates the seated
weight on the front passenger seat and where that
weight is located. The OCS communicates the classifi-
cation status to the ORC. The ORC uses the classifica-
tion to determine whether the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation rate should be adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is impor-
tant for the front passenger to be seated properly and
properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passen-
gers are:
•
Sitting upright
•
Facing forward
•
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet com-
fortably on or near the floor
•
Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small
adult, occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag. This does not mean that the OCS is work-
ing improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS deter-
mines the most probable classification of the occupant
that it detects. The OCS will detect the front passen-
ger’s decreased or increased seated weight, which may
result in an adjusted inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not
mean that the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing
the front passenger’s seated weight on the front pas-
senger seat may result in a reduced-power deployment
of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing
Seated Properly
174 SAFETY
the front passenger’s seated weight on the front pas-
senger seat may result in a full-power deployment of
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
•
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or
instrument panel).
•
The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or
turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
•
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full
upright position.
•
The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
•
Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
•
Objects are lodged between the front passenger
seat and center console.
•
Accessories that may change the seated weight on
the front passenger seat are attached to the front
passenger seat.
•
Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most prob-
able classification. If an occupant in the front passen-
ger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide
an output signal to the OCS that is different from the
occupant’s properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
SAFETY 175
6
WARNING!
•
If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or
adult in the front passenger seat is seated improp-
erly, the occupant may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different from the occupant’s prop-
erly seated weight input. This may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
•
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with
the seatback in an upright position, your back
against the seatback, sitting upright, facing for-
ward, in the center of the seat, with your feet com-
fortably on or near the floor.
•
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger
seat. Holding an object may provide an output sig-
nal to the OCS that is different than the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
•
Placing an object on the floor under the front pas-
senger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on
the floor under the front passenger seat.
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS
may affect the operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on, or
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as
you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the
OCS components must function as designed. Do not
make any modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat,
trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason,
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA US
LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
•
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
•
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the spe-
cific model being repaired. Always use the correct
seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
•
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
•
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
•
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint Sys-
tem (SRS) component or SRS related component or
fastener be modified or replaced with any part
except those which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
•
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents, seat cover or cushion may inadvertently
change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal
collision. This could result in death or serious
injury to the front passenger if the vehicle is
involved in a collision. A modified vehicle may not
comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
•
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
•
Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below
the steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air
Bag provides enhanced protection during a frontal
impact by working together with the seat belts, preten-
sioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
176 SAFETY
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a
label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the
seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating
SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at
a very high speed and with such a high force that it
could injure occupants if they are not seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering
the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other inju-
ries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in cer-
tain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction
potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Chil-
dren are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploy-
ing air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or com-
plete ejection of vehicle occupants through side win-
dows in certain side impact events.
WARNING!
•
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the deploy-
ment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the
side windows where the SABIC and its deployment
path are located should remain free from any
obstructions.
•
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws)
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into
the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain
side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air
Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based
on the severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate
response to impact events. The system is calibrated to
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occu-
pant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SAFETY 177
6
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not
a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some
side collisions that do not impact the area of the pas-
senger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy
during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front
air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than
it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
•
Occupants, including children, who are up against
or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children,
should never lean on or sleep against the door,
side windows, or area where the side air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child
restraint.
•
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly
restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that
is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
•
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the cen-
ter of the seat.
•
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
•
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you prop-
erly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy
at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you
have Side Air Bags.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed
to activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether deploy-
ment in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based
on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags and seat belt pretensioners should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not
deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system
determines if a rollover event may be in progress and
whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the
vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
and deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing
system will deploy the side air bags and seat belt pre-
tensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or com-
plete ejection of vehicle occupants through side win-
dows in certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Air Bag Warning Light
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Knee Impact Bolsters
•
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
•
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
•
Supplemental Side Air Bags
•
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Seat Belt Pretensioners
•
Seat Track Position Sensors
•
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
178 SAFETY
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags,
any or all of the following may occur:
•
The air bag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the
air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are simi-
lar to friction rope burns or those you might get slid-
ing along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not
caused by contact with chemicals. They are not per-
manent and normally heal quickly. However, if you
haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if
you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
•
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-
like particles. The particles are a normal by-product
of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used
for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may
irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have
skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the
irritation continues, see your doctor. If these par-
ticles settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immedi-
ately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
•
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
•
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication net-
work remains intact, and the power remains intact,
depending on the nature of the event, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine whether to
have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
•
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
•
Cut off battery power to the electric motor
(if equipped)
•
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long
as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response
System
•
Unlock the power door locks
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of
these other functions in response to the Enhanced Acci-
dent Response System:
•
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
•
Cut off battery power to the:
○ Engine
○ Electric Motor (if equipped)
○ Electric power steering
○ Brake booster
○ Electric park brake
○ Automatic transmission gear selector
○ Horn
○ Front wiper
NOTE:
After an accident, place the ignition in the STOP (OFF/
LOCK) position and remove the key from the ignition
switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check the
vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and
on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the
engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the
vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an acci-
dent, reset the system by following the procedure
described below. If you have any doubt, contact an
authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
After the event occurs, when the system is active, a
message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the
ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/ON/
RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the
vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and
on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the
engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the left and right
turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may
both be blinking and will continue to blink. In order to
move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must fol-
low the system reset procedure.
SAFETY 179
6
Customer Action
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
Customer Will See
1. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State).
2. Turn ignition MAR/ON/RUN.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
3. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
4. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
5. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
6. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
7. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
8. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
9. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral
State).
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light is OFF.
11. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK.
12. Turn ignition MAR/ON/RUN. (Entire sequence needs to be completed within one
minute or sequence will need to be repeated).
System is now reset and the engine may be started.
Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually).
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be successful.
180 SAFETY
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to pro-
tect you. Do not modify the components or wiring,
including adding any kind of badges or stickers to
the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper pas-
senger side of the instrument panel. Do not modify
the front fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in
any way (including removal or loosening/tightening
of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabili-
ties, contact an authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in cer-
tain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
•
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
•
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
•
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
•
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-
trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during
a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buck-
led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter how
strong you are. The child and others could be badly
injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for chil-
dren from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can
install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
•
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1–888–327–4236
•
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
https://tc.canada.ca/en/road-transportation/
child-car-seat-safety
SAFETY 181
6
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who have
not reached the height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have out-
grown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can
be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direc-
tion than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-
facing by children who have outgrown their infant car-
rier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-
positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit
properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster
seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
182 SAFETY
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident,
it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear
seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitting all
the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touch-
ing the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then
the child still needs to use a booster seat in this
vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check
seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt
buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can
move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt con-
tacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the cen-
ter of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the
seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder
belt will not protect a child properly, which may result
in serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) XX
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
SAFETY 183
6
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets
the seatback and one top tether anchorage located
behind the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions
may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchor-
ages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to
attach the child restraint?
65 lb (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lb (29.5
kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight is more than
65 lb (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchor-
age system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages
if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
LATCH Label
LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seat-
ing Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
184 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using
the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard
seating positions?
Yes
You can install child restraints with flexible lower anchors
in the center position. The inner anchorages are
16 inches (400 mm) apart. Do not install child restraints
with rigid lower anchors in the center position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common
lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position next to a child seat using
the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows con-
tact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that
are found at the rear of the seat cushion
where it meets the seatback, below the
anchorage symbols on the seatback. They
are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the gap between the seatback
and seat cushion.
Lower Anchorage Location
SAFETY 185
6
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind
each rear seating position located on the
back of the seat.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to
the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connec-
tion to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints
and some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have
a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage
and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the
anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments
in the center seating position. Only install this type of child
restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child restraints
with flexible, webbing mounted lower attachments can be
installed in any rear seating position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCH-
compatible child restraints next to each other, you
must use the seat belt for the center position. You
can then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehi-
cle’s seat belt for installing child seats in the out-
board positions.
Please see
page 186 for typical installation
instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See
page 187
to check what type of seat belt each seating position
has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
for that seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise
the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in
the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to
the top tether anchorage. See
page 188 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch
(25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-
ALR (ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they
play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor.
Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH sys-
tem, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and
out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt inter-
feres with the child restraint installation, instead of
buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it.
Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the
vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they
should not play with them.
Tether Anchorage Locations
186 SAFETY
WARNING!
•
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they
to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
•
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the
seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the web-
bing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the
ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is
pulled back into the retractor.
See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
page 170 for additional information on ALR.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For
Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to
attach a forward-facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
install a forward-facing child restraint, up to the recom-
mended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
against the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an
ALR retractor.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
SAFETY 187
6
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
•
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating posi-
tion. If the second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint (if
adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part
of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the web-
bing to retract back into the retractor. As the web-
bing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, con-
nect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten
the tether strap. See
page 188 for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch
(25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage:
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See
page 184 for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchor-
age. You may need to move the seat forward to pro-
vide better access to the tether anchorage. If there
is no top tether anchorage for that seating position,
move the child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
188 SAFETY
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct
path for the strap between the anchor and the child
seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear
head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where
possible, route the tether strap under the head
restraint and between the two posts. If not possible,
lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
•
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your
pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possi-
bly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking
or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped)
in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by
seat belts.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
MAKE INSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding the seat belt or retractor condi-
tions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
for inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition switch is first placed in the
ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon
as possible. After the bulb check, this light will illumi-
nate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag
System has been detected. It will stay on until the fault
is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately
page 165.
Rear Seat Tether Anchors
SAFETY 189
6
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should be
able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See
an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inop-
erable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only
use a floor mat that does not interfere with the opera-
tion of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use
a floor mat that is securely attached using the floor mat
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair
safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control.
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
•
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a
regular basis.
•
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing
any other floor mat. NEVER install or
stack an additional floor mat on top of
an existing floor mat.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved
floor mat for the specific make, model, and year of
your vehicle.
•
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any
pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the
floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat
in your trunk.
•
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
•
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a
loss of vehicle control.
•
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interfer-
ence with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
•
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the
floor and check the floor mat fasteners are secure
to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to
check for interference with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always
check your floor mat has been properly installed
and is secured to your vehicle using the floor mat
fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU
SHOULD MAKE OUTSIDE THE
VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other
objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the
tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts,
cracks, and bulges. Check the lug nut/bolt torque for
tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper
cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights
and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check
turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instru-
ment panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
190 SAFETY
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
•
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in con-
fined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
•
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
•
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the
vehicle is damaged, have an authorized dealer inspect
the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas
for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned
parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compart-
ment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.
Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions provided to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal con-
ditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
SAFETY 191
6
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located in the
lower center area of the instrument panel.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with an Emergency Stop
Signal (ESS)
page 155.
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning Flash-
ers. When the button is activated, all directional turn
signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of
an emergency. Push the button a second time to turn
off the Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it only when
your vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety hazard
warning for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance,
the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate
even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may
wear down your battery.
SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
If equipped, the Rearview mirror contains an SOS
button.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
NOTE:
•
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber
page 259.
•
The SOS button will only function if you are con-
nected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
network, which comes as a built in function. Other
Uconnect services will only be operable if your
SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active and you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network.
SOS Call
1. Press or hold the SOS Call button on the Rearview
Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there
will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call sys-
tem initiates a call to an SOS operator. To cancel the
SOS Call connection, push the SOS call button on
the Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button
on the Device Screen. Termination of the SOS Call
will turn off the green LED light on the Rearview
Mirror.
2. The LED light located next to the SOS button on the
Rearview Mirror will turn green once a connection to
an SOS operator has been made.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
SOS Mirror
192
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and an SOS
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to an
SOS operator:
○
Indication that the occupant placed an SOS Call
○
The vehicle brand
○
The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional assistance is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
○
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
○
Once a connection is made between the vehi-
cle’s SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the
SOS operator may be able to open a voice con-
nection with the vehicle to determine if addi-
tional assistance is needed. Once the SOS opera-
tor opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s
SOS Call system, the operator should be able to
speak with you or other vehicle occupants and
hear sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehi-
cle’s SOS Call system will attempt to remain con-
nected with the SOS operator until the SOS
operator terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropri-
ate emergency responders and provide them with
important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
•
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from an
Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should
exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe
location.
•
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able network and GPS antennas. You could pre-
vent operable network and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable network and GPS sig-
nal reception is required for the SOS Call system to
function properly.
•
The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehi-
cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical sys-
tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the SOS Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR
AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES,
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
•
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may
not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
•
The Rearview Mirror light located next to the SOS
button will continuously illuminate red.
•
The Device Screen will display the following mes-
sage “Vehicle device requires service. Please con-
tact an authorized dealer.”
•
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle
device requires service. Please contact an autho-
rized dealer.”
WARNING!
•
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
•
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi-
nated, have an authorized dealer service the Occu-
pant Restraint Control system immediately.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 193
7
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
SOS Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
•
The ignition is in the OFF position
•
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
•
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash
•
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash
•
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or
obstructed
•
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility
•
Operator error by the SOS operator
•
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion
•
Weather
•
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
NOTE:
•
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber
page 259.
•
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You
could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle
from placing an emergency call. An operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call system to
function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
immediately connect you with help in the event that
your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to your pro-
vided radio supplement for complete information.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING —
IF EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
•
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
•
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
•
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid
ice or slippery areas.
Scan me
194 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Place the ignition in the OFF position.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if the
driver’s front wheel is being changed, block the pas-
senger’s rear wheel.
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being lifted or raised.
JACK LOCATION/SPARE TIRE
STOWAGE
If equipped, the jack and tools are located in the rear
storage compartment, below the spare tire.
NOTE:
Items may vary depending on the trim level.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
Wheel Blocked Example
Jack And Tools Location
1 — Jack
2 — Alignment Pin
3 — Emergency Funnel
4 — Wheel Bolt Wrench
5 — Screwdriver
Load Floor Handle
Spare Tire Removal
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 195
7
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire, and
remove the spare wheel from the vehicle. The jack
will be found beneath.
4. Remove the alignment pin from the middle, rotate
the jack counterclockwise, and lift it from the foam
tray.
5. Remove the jack and wheel bolt wrench.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire
in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
•
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the trans-
mission in PARK.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely care-
ful of motor traffic.
•
To ensure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt
wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before
raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt
wrench to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts
on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts
counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on
the ground.
NOTE:
Placement for the front and rear jack locations are
critical. See the following images for proper jacking
locations.
Spare Tire Fastener
Jack Warning Label
196 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on loca-
tions other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
4. Jack lifting points can be identified by a triangular
symbol on the outer rocker panel. Place the jack
underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat
tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage
the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange,
centering the jack saddle inside the cutout in the sill
cladding.
Jacking Locations Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 197
7
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Remove the alignment pin from the jack assembly
and thread the pin into the wheel hub to assist in
mounting the spare tire.
8. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
NOTE:
○
For vehicles equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
○
For additional warnings, cautions, and informa-
tion about the spare tire, its use, and operation
page 236.
9. Install and lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a
star pattern until each wheel bolt has been tight-
ened twice
page 251. If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or at a service
station.
12. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel
blocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack
assembly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure
the assembly using the means provided. Release
the parking brake before driving the vehicle.
13. After 25 miles (40 km), check the wheel bolt
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all
wheel bolts are properly seated against the wheel.
14. Place the jack on the foam tray and open it far
enough so that it is secured. Once placed in posi-
tion, rotate it clockwise to lock it in. Replace the
alignment pin in the center hole to lock the jack in
place.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire
in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Mounting Spare Tire
Damaged Tire Stowage
198 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Tire Service Kit. Small punctures up to
1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign
objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed
from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be used in outside
temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C). This
kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is stowed under the load floor
behind the rear seat.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following sym-
bols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
•
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn
to this position for air pump operation
only.
•
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn
to this position to inject the Tire Service
Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire.
•
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button once
to turn the Tire Service Kit on. Push and
release the Power Button again to turn
the Tire Service Kit off.
•
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to reduce the
air pressure in the tire if it becomes
overinflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
•
When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the mate-
rial from the vehicle or tire and wheel components.
Once the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off
and properly discarded.
•
For optimum performance, make sure the valve
stem on the wheel is free of debris before connect-
ing the Tire Service Kit.
Scan me
Load Floor Handle
Tire Service Kit Location
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant/Air Hose
2 — Hose Accessories
3 — Mode Select Knob
4 — Pressure Gauge
5 — Deflation Button
6 — Power Switch
7 — Sealant Bottle
8—PowerPlug
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 199
7
•
You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on
the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls,
rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only
the Air Pump and make sure the Mode Select Knob
is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid
injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than
1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your
vehicle.
•
Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
•
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
○ If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
○ If the tire has any sidewall damage.
○ If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
○ If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
○ If the wheel has any damage.
○ If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
•
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the
place provided. Failure to follow these warnings
can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
•
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swal-
lowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immedi-
ately with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as pos-
sible, if there is any contact with clothing.
•
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physi-
cian immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning Flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the
ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit
flat on the ground. This will provide the best posi-
tioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the
deflated tire and running the air pump. Move the
vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this
position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK and cycle the igni-
tion in the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to
the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem and
then screw the fitting at the end of the
Sealant Hose onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the
plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power
outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails)
from the tire.
Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:
1. Always start the vehicle before turning
the Tire Service Kit on.
2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to the
Sealant Mode position.
3. After pushing the Power Button, the seal-
ant (white fluid) will flow from the Sealant
Bottle through the Sealant Hose and into
the tire.
200 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 –
10 seconds through the Sealant Hose:
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service Kit
off. Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Button to turn the Tire Service Kit on.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt power
outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available.
Make sure the vehicle is running before turning the
Tire Service Kit on.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Seal-
ant Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump until seal-
ant is no longer flowing through hose
(typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the
sealant flows through the Sealant Hose,
the Pressure Gauge can read as high as 70 psi
(4.8 bar). The Pressure Gauge will decrease quickly
from approximately 70 psi (4.8 bar) to the actual tire
pressure when the Sealant Bottle is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the
tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle
is empty. Continue to operate the pump
and inflate the tire to the cold tire infla-
tion pressure found on the tire and loading informa-
tion label located in the driver-side door opening.
Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure
Gauge.
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
•
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is
at least 26 psi (1.8 bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation But-
ton to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
1. Push the Power Button to turn off the
Tire Service Kit.
2. Remove the speed limit label from the
Tire Service Kit and place sticker on the
steering wheel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the
vehicle storage location.
Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and
inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles
(8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure distribution
of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using the Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph
(80 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Fail-
ure to follow this warning can result in injuries that
are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and oth-
ers around you. Have the tire checked as soon as
possible at an authorized dealer.
After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location.
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to
the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem,
and then screw the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug
into the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.
5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the fitting at
the end of the hose onto the valve stem.
6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and turn to
the Air Mode position.
7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading
the Pressure Gauge.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 201
7
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn on Tire
Service Kit and inflate the tire to the cold
tire inflation pressure found on the tire
and loading information label located in
the driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from
12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area
in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at
the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or
tire service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the steering
wheel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized
dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
Sealant Bottle Replacement:
1. Unwrap the power cord.
2. Unwrap the hose.
3. Remove the bottle cover.
4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to release.
5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.
Unwrap The Hose
Remove The Bottle Cover
Rotate The Bottle Up
Remove The Bottle
202 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
•
For sealant bottle installation, follow these steps in
reverse order.
•
The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use and
needs to be replaced after each use. Always replace
these components immediately at your original
equipment vehicle dealer.
•
Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior to
the expiration date (printed on the bottle label) to
ensure optimum operation of the system.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improp-
erly, so please follow the procedures in this section
carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located in the engine com-
partment, behind the left headlight assembly.
WARNING!
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving
fan blades.
•
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadver-
tent electrical contact. You could be seriously
injured.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
NOTE:
The positive (+) battery post is covered with a protective
cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the post.
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic trans-
mission into PARK (P) and turn the ignition to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective cover over
the positive (+) battery post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery,
park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set
the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
Sealant Bottle Expiration Date Location
Positive (+) Battery Post
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 203
7
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to
the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground. A “ground” is an
exposed metallic/unpainted part of the engine,
frame or chassis, such as an accessory bracket or
large bolt. The ground must be away from the bat-
tery and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical
spark could cause the battery to explode and could
result in personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle for a few minutes, and
then start the engine in the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the disconnecting
procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery, and reinstall the
protective cap.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle, you should have the battery and charging sys-
tem inspected at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel for a
Capless Fuel System. If emergency refueling is neces-
sary, while using an approved gas can, insert the refuel-
ing funnel into the filler neck opening. Take care to
open both flappers with the funnel to avoid spills.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
(Continued)
Jump Starting Label
204 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator
Light to turn on.
•
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door
from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel
door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A funnel
is provided to allow emergency refueling with a gas can.
See the following steps for refueling:
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the
fuel nozzle.
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper doors
open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Potential signs of vehicle overheating:
•
Temperature gauge is at HOT (H)
•
Strong smell of coolant
•
White smoke coming from engine or exhaust
•
Coolant bottle coolant has bubbles present
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do
not open the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
If the temperature gauge is moving towards or close to
the HOT (H) position, you can reduce the potential for
overheating by taking the appropriate action.
•
On highways — slow down.
•
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmis-
sion in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine
idle speed while preventing vehicle motion with the
brakes.
•
Turn off the Air Conditioner (A/C). The A/C system
adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning
the A/C off can help remove this heat.
•
Turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the
mode control to floor and the blower control to high.
This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
Fuel Funnel Location
Inserting Funnel
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 205
7
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over
and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air con-
ditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”
and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs, and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following
procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Grab the boot material rearward of the gear selector
and pull up to carefully separate the gear selector
bezel and boot assembly from the center console.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake
pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into
the gear selector override access hole (at the right
rear corner of the gear selector assembly), and push
and hold the override release lever down.
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL (N) position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector boot.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around
the front wheels. Push and hold the lock button on the
gear selector. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
(D) and REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the
accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N) for
more than two seconds, you must press the brake
pedal to engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure
that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning
the wheels or racing the engine.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage,
or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for lon-
ger than 30 seconds continuously without stopping
when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF button (if necessary), to place the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial Off”
mode, before rocking the vehicle
page 153. Once
the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF button
again to restore “ESC On” mode.
Gear Selector Bezel
Gear Selector Override Access Hole
206 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
•
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rocking-
motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
•
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE/SECOND gear and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drive-
train damage may result.
•
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground FWD MODELS 4X4 MODELS
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Front OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD ONLY METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains
is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing devices
to main structural members of the vehicle, not to
fascia/bumper or associated brackets. State and local
laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
NOTE:
•
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle to avoid inadver-
tent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park
Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the cus-
tomer programmable features in the Uconnect
Settings.
•
Vehicles with a discharged battery, or total electrical
failure when the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is
engaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the
rear wheels off the ground when moving the vehicle
onto a flatbed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters,
etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the
ON/RUN mode.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 207
7
Note that the Safehold feature will engage the Electric
Park Brake whenever the driver's door is opened (if the
battery is connected, ignition is ON, transmission is not
in PARK, and brake pedal is released). If you are towing
this vehicle with the ignition in the ON/RUN mode, you
must manually disable the Electric Park Brake each
time the driver's door is opened by pressing the brake
pedal and then releasing the EPB.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, instructions on
shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK so that
the vehicle can be moved
page 206.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
•
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
•
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
and remains released, while being towed.
•
Do not use a fascia/bumper mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The fascia/bumper face
bar will be damaged.
WITHOUT THE KEY FOB
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the OFF mode. The only approved
method of towing without the key fob is with a flatbed
truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE (FWD)
MODELS — WITH KEY FOB
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all
four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must
be towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front
wheels raised).
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed. The Electric Park
Brake does not need to be released if all four wheels
are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the approved
requirements can cause severe engine and/or trans-
mission damage. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
4X4 MODELS
FCA US LLC requires towing with all four wheels OFF the
ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed,
or with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite
end on a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
•
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
•
Towing this vehicle in violation of the approved
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars
and other equipment designed for this purpose,
following equipment manufacturer's instructions.
•
Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar
or other towing devices to main structural mem-
bers of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumper or associ-
ated brackets.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS —
IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the
vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver's
side of the vehicle.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of
the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to
the vehicle.
208 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Vehicles With Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, and subse-
quently in OFF, without opening the door. During towing,
remember that not having the aid of the power brakes
and the electromechanical power steering will require
greater force when applying the brakes and steering of
the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
•
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, caus-
ing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could dam-
age your vehicle.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
This feature is a communication network that takes
effect in the event of an impact
page 179.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data
that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s sys-
tems performed under certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle
page 181.
Front Tow Hooks Location
Rear Tow Hook Location
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 209
7
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate in the instrument clus-
ter. This means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips,
trailer tow and extremely hot or cold ambient tempera-
tures will influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil
Change Required” message is displayed. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If
a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than an authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under Instrument Clus-
ter Display
page 65.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), one year or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first.
The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally
only a concern for fleet customers.
NOTE:
The Oil Change Indicator will not illuminate under these
conditions.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
•
Check engine oil level.
•
Check windshield washer fluid level.
•
Check the tire inflation pressures and look for
unusual wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first
sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil
indicator system turns on.
•
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, and
brake master cylinder reservoir, and fill as needed.
•
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace the engine air cleaner filter if necessary.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
210
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes
First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
OrYears:2345678 91011121314 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and
boot seals, replace if necessary.
XXXX X X X
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X XXXXXX X XX X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner,
idler pulley, and replace if necessary.
X
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Replace spark plugs.
* XX
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
* The spark plug change interval is mileage based only; yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about
your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
•
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 211
8
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.0L ENGINE
1 — Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap 6 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 8 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Battery
212 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time
to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after
a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
•
Crosshatched zone.
•
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
•
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end
of the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
•
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN
and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 qt (1 L) of oil when the reading is at the low
end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
high end of the range marking.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine
compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual washer fluid.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid, apply it to a cloth or towel, and wipe clean
the wiper blades; this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free bat-
tery. You will never have to add water, and periodic
maintenance is not required.
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immedi-
ately with large amounts of water
page 203.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure
washer is not recommended.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts
and connections however, the pressures generated
by these machines is such that complete protection
against water ingress cannot be guaranteed.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 213
8
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems
may void your warranty and could result in civil penal-
ties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
For engine oil selection page 254.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified by
the API. The manufacturer only recommends API trade-
mark oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies
0W-40 and 5W-40 engine oil.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only
use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct
API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
bers should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection
dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered prod-
uct and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil
and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to
the environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for
replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified filters
should be used. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter is unavail-
able, only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/
USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals page 210.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is neces-
sary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before starting
(Continued)
214 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality Mopar® certified filters should be used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Follow the recommended maintenance intervals as
shown in the Maintenance Schedule in this section.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Loosen the fasteners from the engine air cleaner
filter cover using a suitable tool.
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access the
engine air cleaner filter by rotating at the hinge and
pulling the cover away from the engine.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the hous-
ing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if significant dirt or
debris is present before replacing the engine air
cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the housing
assembly with the engine air cleaner filter inspec-
tion surface facing downward.
2. Tighten engine air cleaner filter cover fasteners
using a suitable tool.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the engine air cleaner filter cover
lid screws or damage may result.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This service
should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a
performance test. Drive belt tension should also be
checked at this time.
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located in your owner’s
information kit, for further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Fasteners
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 215
8
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf — If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance
with a low global-warming potential. It is recommended
that air conditioning service be performed by an autho-
rized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
See an authorized dealer for service.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium-based grease,
such as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and wear.
Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts con-
cerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge
or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and
help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always
use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt
or dirt from a dry windshield or rear window.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are
not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid
damaging the blade. Keep the wiper blade out of con-
tact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gaso-
line, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
geographical area and frequency of use. If chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots are present, clean the
wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass
may be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
Windshield Wiper Arm And Blade
1—Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
216 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
flip up the locking tab.
3. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away from the
arm and with one finger push the release tab toward
the wiper arm.
4. Slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the
wiper arm.
5. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm
with one hand and separating the wiper blade from
the wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade down toward the base of the wiper arm and
away from the J hook in the end of the wiper arm).
6. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper
arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on the tip
of the wiper arm with the wiper locking tab open.
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper assembly
into the hook on the tip of the arm through the
opening in the wiper blade under the locking tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper
arm until it is latched (engagement will be accompa-
nied by an audible click). Fold down the latch
release tab and snap it into its locked position.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Wiper Locking Assembly
1—Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
Wiper Disengaging
1 — Locking Tab
2—Wiper
3 — Release Tab
Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm
1—Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm J Hook
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 217
8
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass
to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped
first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm
without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may
damage the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grab
the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper
arm with your right hand. With your left hand, hold
the wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from
the wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap
the wiper blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the
end of the wiper arm.
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible snap.
4. Still holding the bottom end of the wiper blade,
move the wiper blade upward and away from the
wiper arm to disengage.
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass
to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped
first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm
without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may
damage the vehicle.
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
4 — Wiper Arm
218 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on
the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of
the wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper
blade flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into
place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the
wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust sys-
tem; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust
fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.
Replace as required.
WARNING!
•
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain Car-
bon Monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odor-
less. Breathing it can make you unconscious and
can eventually poison you
page 189.
•
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn, such materials might
be grass or leaves, and those items that come into
(Continued)
WARNING!
contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or
operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust
system can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
•
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy
the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions
control device and may seriously reduce engine
performance and cause serious damage to the
engine.
•
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Con-
tinued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is
important to keep the engine properly tuned to ensure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Ser-
vice, including a tune-up to manufacturer specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
•
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission
is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
•
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing
the vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING!
•
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
•
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised.
The fan starts automatically and may start at any
time, whether the engine is running or not.
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to
the OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled
and can start at any time the ignition is in the ON
mode.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 219
8
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and
refilled with fresh engine coolant. Check the front of the
A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a gar-
den hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly.
Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe
internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be
added to the system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the proper mainte-
nance intervals
page 210.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information page 254.
NOTE:
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant, may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. OAT engine coolant is
different and should not be mixed with Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
or any “globally compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT
engine coolant is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibi-
tors or anti-rust products, as they may not be com-
patible with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with pro-
pylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of propyl-
ene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
•
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any cool-
ant is needed to be added to the system please con-
tact an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To
prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important to use the same engine coolant (OAT cool-
ant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of
your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using OAT
engine coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032. When add-
ing engine coolant:
•
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032.
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water.
Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if
temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated.
Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce
the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
•
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the
vehicle is operated.
•
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any cool-
ant is needed to be added to the system, please
contact an authorized dealer.
•
Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended
and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT
and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a
authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine
coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank (if equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing
surfaces.
220 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
•
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build-up in the cooling system. To prevent scald-
ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
the system is hot or under pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet,
seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any
ground spills immediately.
Engine Coolant Level
WARNING!
•
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build-up in the cooling system. To prevent scald-
ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
the system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
WARNING!
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine
coolant should be within the OK range between the
ADD and FULL range on the dipstick.
1. Remove the cap with level dipstick from the engine
coolant bottle.
2. Clean off the coolant from the dipstick.
3. Rest the cap on the opening of the coolant bottle
without tightening the cap.
4. Remove the cap with dipstick and check the coolant
level on the dipstick.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there
is no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant freeze point or
replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac-
tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to maintain
the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows
no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may
be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
•
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against
freezing.
•
If frequent engine coolant additions are required,
the cooling system should be pressure tested for
leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a mini-
mum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine which contains aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle over-
flow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 221
8
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs
may result in unsatisfactory engine cooling perfor-
mance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
For the proper maintenance intervals
page 210.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high
brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and pos-
sible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services or immediately if
the Brake Warning Light is illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area
before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring
the fluid level up to the requirements described on the
brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid
level should be checked when pads are replaced. How-
ever, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a
checkup may be needed.
Use only the manufacturer recommended brake fluid
page 255.
WARNING!
•
Use only the manufacturer recommended brake
fluid
page 255. Using the wrong type of brake
fluid can severely damage your brake system
and/or impair its performance. The proper type of
brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
•
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from
the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
•
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake fail-
ure. This could result in a collision.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
It is strongly recommended against using any special
additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission
Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its perfor-
mance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the trans-
mission. The only exception to this policy is the use of
special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks in 8-speed trans-
missions. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required; therefore
the transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer
can check your transmission fluid level using special
service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to
have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating
the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause
severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
222 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How-
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life.
Use only the manufacturer specified transmission fluid
page 255. It is important to maintain the transmis-
sion fluid at the correct level using the recommended
fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmis-
sion; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. For fluid specifications
page 255.
FUSES
General Information
WARNING!
•
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating
as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with
another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a
blown fuse with metal wires or any other material.
Do not place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses may
result in serious personal injury, fire and/or prop-
erty damage.
•
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the igni-
tion is off and that all the other services are
switched off and/or disengaged.
•
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
•
If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result
in vehicle battery discharge.
Fuse Location
The fuses are grouped into controllers located in the
engine compartment.
Power Distribution Center/Fuses
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays. Fuse cavity location are printed on the inside of
the power distribution center cover.
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it
is important to ensure the cover is properly posi-
tioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
Blade Fuses
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
3 — Blade Fuse with a bad/not functional fuse element
(blown fuse)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 223
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare
F02 – – Spare
F03 – – Spare
Underhood Power Distribution Location
224 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F04 30 Amp Tan – Rear Defroster (EBL)*
F05 – – Spare
F06 40 Amp – TTM*
F07 40 Amp – Smart Electric Oil Pump
F08 20 Amp – SLM Feed LT*
F09 30 Amp – Power Feed
F10 20 Amp – SLM Feed RT*
F11 30 Amp –
BCMFeed3/(Run/Start & FB Relay and
Start/Stop & FB Relay in BCM) / Aux PDC
Power Feed
F12 40 Amp – BSM Pump
F13 40 Amp – BSM Valves
F14 – – Spare
F15 40 Amp – Starter Motor Solenoid Fuse
F16 – – –
F17 40Amp – HVACFan
F18 30 Amp – Brake Vacuum Pump
F19 – 2 Amp Micro Fuse Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)
F20 – 7.5 Amp
Engine Control Module (ECM) / Dual
Clutch Transmission Mod (DTCM) /Dual
Clutch Shifter Mod (DCSM) / Rad Fan
Coil Relay
F21 – – Spare
F22 – 7.5 Amp AC Compressor
F23 – – Spare
F24 – 7.5 Amp Side Mirrors Defrost
F25 – 20 Amp LT HID Lamp
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 225
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F26 – 20 Amp
Lumbar Adjust (Driver Seat Only) / Driver
& Pass Front Heater Seat SW / Driver &
Pass Rear Heater Seat SW / BVP RLY
Coil
F27 – 25 Amp
Engine Control Module (ECM) / Fuel
Injectors / Snsr GPF EGT
F28 – 15 Amp LTR Coolant Pump
F29A & B – – Spare
F30 – 20 Amp RT HID Lamp
F31 – 15 Amp
Wireless Charging Pad / SW Bank Lower
2 / SW Bank Lower LT & RT / Port UCI 2
F32 – 20 Amp
Fuel Injectors / Ignition Coils / Ignition
Coil Capacitors
F33 – 10 Amp Relay Coil Power Control Relay *
F34A & B – – Spare
F35 – – Spare
F36 – 10Amp PortUCI2/ModCVPM
F37 – 10 Amp Surge Solenoid / Surge Solenoid Bypass
F38 – 10 Amp
ECM / TCM / AGSM / DCSM / STM / Fuel
Pump Relay Coil / SEOP / TCM 8-Speed
F39 – – Spare
F40 – 15 Amp Trans Control Module Feed #1 8-Speed
F41 – – Spare
F42 – 20 Amp Cargo Power Outlet – Ignition power
F43 – –
Cargo Power Outlet (Can be replaced
with 20 Amp fuse in F42 direct battery
power)
F44 – 15 Amp Trans Control Module Feed #2 8-Speed
226 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F45 – – Spare
F46 – 30 Amp
Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) AWD
Power
F47 – 30 Amp Front Windshield Defrost*
F48 – – Spare
F49 – – Spare
F50 – 5 Amp
Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) ECU
Power
F51 – – Spare
F52 – 5 Amp
Automatic Gearbox Shifter Module
(AGSM) / Dual Clutch Shifter Mod
(DCSM)
F53 – – Spare
F54 – – Spare
F55 – – Spare
F56 – – Spare
F57 – 20 Amp RR Power Outlet (12 Volt APO)
F58 – – Spare
F59 – – Spare
F60 – – Spare
F61 – 20 Amp Fuel Pump
F62 – 5 Amp Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
F63 – – Spare
F64 – 10 Amp
MOD DCSD / Handsfree Liftgate / UCI +
USB Port / HRLS
F65 – 20 Amp Horn
F66 – 20 Amp Cigar Lighter*
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 227
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F67 – 10 Amp Engine Control Module (ECM)
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located on the driver’s side under the instrument panel lower cover.
Cavity Blade Fuse Description
*If Equipped
F31 7.5 Amp Brown Occupant Restraint Controller
F33 20 Amp Yellow Window Motor Passenger
F34 20 Amp Yellow Window Motor Driver
F36 20 Amp Yellow
Intrusion Module/Siren, Radio, UCI/USB Port, VSU, Climate Control, Electronic Steering
Lock, Power Folding Mirrors, Security Gateway/DTV
F37 10 Amp Red
Instrument Panel Cluster, Drivetrain Control Module, Adaptive Cruise, ECC (HVAC) Blower
F38 20 Amp Yellow Door Lock/Unlock, Liftgate Release
F42 7.5 Amp Brown Brake System Module, Electric Power Steering
F43 20 Amp Yellow Washer Pump Front And Rear
F47 20 Amp Yellow Rear Left Window Lifter
F48 20 Amp Yellow Rear Right Window Lifter
F49 7.5 Amp Brown
Park Assist, Blind Spot, Voltage Stabilizer, Humidity Sensor, Electronic Steering Lock,
Temp Sense, Mirror, Heated Seats, Light And Rain Sensor, Start Stop Switch
F50 7.5 Amp Brown Occupant Restraint Controller
F51 7.5 Amp Brown
Electronic Climate Control, Occupant Classification, Rear View Camera, Climate Con-
trol, Headlamp Leveling, Terrain Select, Heated Rear Window, Trailer Tow, Haptic Lane
Mod
F53 7.5 Amp Brown Keyless Ignition Node Module, Electric Park Brake, RF Hub, Cluster
F94 15 Amp Blue Lumbar Adjust Driver Seat, Power Outlets
228 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit
- If Equipped
To access the fuses, remove the storage bin from the
left rear panel of the rear cargo area.
The fuses may be contained in two units. Fuse Holder
No. 1 is located closest to the rear of the vehicle and
Fuse Holder No. 2 (If equipped with trailer towing) is
located closest to the front of the vehicle.
NOTE:
The fuse may be contained in an In-line Fuse holder
(If equipped with a Sunroof or Power Inverter Module).
Fuse Holder No. 2
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F1 10 Amp Red TTM IGN Feed *
F5 15 Amp Blue Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Driver’s Side) *
F6 15 Amp Blue Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Passenger Side) *
F7 10 Amp Red TTM Jumper Battery Feed *
Rear Fuse Box Location
Rear Cargo Fuse Cavities
2 — Fuse Holder No. 2
1 — Fuse Holder No. 1
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 229
8
Fuse Holder No. 1
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F2 30 Amp Green Memory Seat
F3 20 Amp Yellow Sunroof*
F4 30 Amp Green Power Seat (Passenger Side)
F5 30 Amp Green Power Seat (Driver Side)
F6 7.5 Amp Brown Power Lumbar (Power Seats)
F8 20 Amp Yellow Heated Seats*
On the Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit bracket, there is a Maxi Fuse Holder for the Power Liftgate and an ATO / UniVAL Fuse Holder for the HIFI Audio System.
Cavity Maxi Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 30 Amp Green Power Liftgate*
* If Equipped
Cavity ATO / UniVAL Fuse Description
F02 25 Amp Clear HIFI Audio System*
230 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Courtesy Light C5W
Front Courtesy Lights (Sun Visors) C5W
Rear Dome Light (Models Without Retractable Roof) C5W
Rear Interior Lights (Models With Retractable Roof) C5W
Interior Lights HT-168
Dome Light (Glove Box) HT-168
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlamps LED
High Beam Headlamps LED
Front Position/Daytime Running Lights (DRL)/Front Directional - Premium LED
Front Direction Indicator & Position Lamps - Base 7442NA
Side Marker Lamp Base:2825
Front Fog Lamps Base: H11LL/ Premium LED
Side Indicators (Side View Mirror) LED
Tail/Brake Lights
Premium Tail Lights: LED
Base Tail Lights: W21/5WLL
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 231
8
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Turn Indicators
W21WLL For Premium Tail Lamps
W21/5WLL For Base Tail Lamps
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED
License Plate Lamp LED
Liftgate Lamp Reverse W21WLL
Liftgate Lamp Tail LED
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
WARNING!
Carry out the operation of replacing lamps only with
the engine off. Also make sure that the engine is cold,
to avoid the danger of burns.
Turn Signal Light/Position Lights (Base)
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Open hood.
2. Reach behind headlamp near the radiator.
3. Remove the electrical connectors.
4. For the turn signal bulb, rotate in a counterclockwise
direction and remove the bulb and bulb socket. Pull
the bulb axially to remove it from the socket.
5. Install the bulb and sockets and rotate them clock-
wise making sure that it is properly locked.
6. Reconnect the electrical connectors.
7. Close hood.
Front Fog Lights (Base)
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Remove the wheel liner.
3. By pushing the electrical connector tab remove the
electrical connector.
4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise, and then replace
the bulb.
5. Insert the new bulb in the socket, making sure the
bulb is locked into place.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Reinstall the wheel liner.
Side Indicators
The Side Indicators are LED. See an authorized dealer
for replacement.
Rear Body Side Tail Lamps
Contain the following:
•
Position lights
•
Stop lights
•
Direction indicator
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Using a suitable tool remove fasteners covering the
screws.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector by pushing the
release.
4. Remove the rear body side tail lamp, sliding it away
from the back of the vehicle.
Fog Lamp Bulb
232 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5. Replace the bulb as necessary by turning and
removing the bulb housing.
6. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly
locked.
7. Reposition the rear body side lamp assembly on the
car.
8. Reconnect the electrical connector.
9. Reinstall the body side lamp making sure to align
the ball studs.
10. Install fasteners and tighten body side lamp
assembly.
11. Finally close the tailgate.
Reverse Lamps
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Using a suitable tool remove the access panel for
body side lamps, remove liftgate access cover for
liftgate lamps.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector by pushing the
release.
4. Remove bulb and replace making sure it is properly
locked.
5. Reconnect the electrical connector.
6. Reinstall the access panels making sure they are
locked in correctly.
7. Finally close the liftgate.
NOTE:
Refer to an authorized dealer for service.
3rd Stop Lamp
The CHMSL is LED. See an authorized dealer for
replacement.
License Plate Lights
The License Plate light is LED. See an authorized dealer
for replacement.
Body Side Tail Lamp
1 — Rear Body Side Tail Lamp
2 — Ball Stud
Reverse Side of Tail Lamp
1 — Direction Indicator Bulb / Stop Lamp Bulb
2 — Electrical Connector
3 — Ball Studs
Body Side Tail Lamp
1 — Rear Body Side Tail Lamp
2 — Ball Stud
Liftgate
1 — Liftgate Access Covers
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 233
8
Replacing Interior Bulbs
Front Courtesy Light
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Using a suitable tool remove the front courtesy light
assembly.
2.
Release the retainer clips and bulb housing as shown.
3. Replace the bulbs by pulling straight out of bulb
housing.
4. Insert the new bulbs, making sure that they are
properly locked.
5. Reassemble the bulb housing and courtesy light
housing making sure that they are properly locked.
6. Install the front courtesy light, making sure that it is
properly locked.
Dome Light Vanity Mirror — If Equipped
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Lift the cover of the mirror and pull out the mirror
frame with the mirror light cover attached.
2. Replace the bulb, releasing it from the side con-
tacts, and then insert the new bulb, making sure
that it is properly locked between the contacts.
3. Reinstall the visor mirror light cover making sure
that it is properly locked.
4. Finally lower the visor mirror cover to the mirror.
Dome Light Glove Compartment
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
1. Open the glove compartment.
2. Place your fingers inside the light assembly, pull the
bulb to replace it.
Front Courtesy Light
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
1 — Retaining Clips
2 — Bulb Housing
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
Visor
1 — Visor Mirror Cover
2 — Visor Mirror Light
234 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly
locked.
Dome Light
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Lower the handle in the direction shown; remove the
dome light.
2.
Replace the bulb by removing it from the side contacts.
3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the contacts.
4. Reinstall the dome light.
Interior Cargo Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Using thumb with slight pressure – push bulb holder
to the side.
2. Fully disengage the bulb holder from the housing.
3. Rotate bulb holder to replace bulb.
Bulb Removal/Installation
Grab Handle/Dome Light
Bulb
Bulb Holder
Bulb Holder
Bulb
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 235
8
WARNING!
•
Modifications or repair of the electrical system per-
formed incorrectly and without taking into account
the technical characteristics can cause malfunc-
tions with the risk of fire.
•
Halogen lamps contain gas under pressure, in the
event of breakage be careful of the projection of
fragments of glass.
•
Halogen lamps must be handled by touching only
the metallic part. If the transparent bulb is in con-
tact with the fingers, reduces the intensity of the
emitted light and you can also affect the life of the
lamp. In case of accidental contact, rub the bulb
with a cloth dampened with alcohol and allow to
dry.
NOTE:
It is recommended to have your bulbs replaced by an
authorized dealer.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the follow-
ing information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Num-
bers, Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures,
and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard
have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning
with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from
this tire size designation. Example:
215/65R15 96H.
•
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall pre-
ceding the size designation. Example:
LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Markings
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-
ture Grades
236 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
•
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
•
"R" means radial construction, or
•
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
•
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
•
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
•
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions,
and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 237
8
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code,
located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side,
then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
•
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
01 means the year 2001
•
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the
3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of psi
(pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum infla-
tion pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Manufacturer recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
238 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side
door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to
the recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
LOADING
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle.
You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if
you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold
tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire And Load-
ing Information Placard
page 124.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross Axle
Weight Ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded
page 124.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire And Loading Information Placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 239
8
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
•
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustra-
tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
240 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 241
8
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
•
Safety
•
Fuel Economy
•
Tread Wear
•
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
WARNING!
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
•
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
•
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
•
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
•
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
•
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause
the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side
door.
At least once a month:
•
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgment when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
underinflated.
•
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide
range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary
with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa)
per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in
mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage,
especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi
(21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
(7°C) for this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal
pressure build-up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is
242 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced
vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle
operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe oper-
ating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires
could cause them to fail. You could have a serious
collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maxi-
mum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
•
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
•
The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
•
The puncture is no greater than ¼ of an inch
(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size
and service description (Load Index and Speed Sym-
bol). Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not
designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of infla-
tion pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to
as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when
the tire inflation pressure is/or below 14 psi (96 kPa).
Once a Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced
immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a
Run Flat tire is changed after being driven under a Run
Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition, please replace the
TPMS sensor as it is not designed to be reused.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle
on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended to drive a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
For more information
page 162.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do
not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping
page 206.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds con-
tinuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone
near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires should
be replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When
the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire
should be replaced
page 244.
Tire Tread
1 — Tread Wear Indicators
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 243
8
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying fac-
tors including, but not limited to:
•
Driving style.
•
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across
the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will
reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
•
Distance driven.
•
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle
scheduled maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
NOTE:
The Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The
manufacturer strongly recommends using tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed
page 243. Refer to
the Tire And Loading Information Placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall.
For more information relating to the Load Index and
Speed Symbol of a tire
page 236.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely
affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and
wheels may change suspension dimensions and
performance characteristics, resulting in changes
to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle.
This can cause unpredictable handling and stress
to steering and suspension components. You could
(Continued)
WARNING!
lose control and have a collision resulting in seri-
ous injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capac-
ity other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer
readings.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different All Season tires. All Season tires can
be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation
on the tire sidewall. Use All Season tires only in sets of
four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
244 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry con-
ditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on
ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C)
or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more infor-
mation, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation
or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can
be identified by a mountain/snowflake sym-
bol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size
and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect
the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over
75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized
tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a
spare tire
page 199.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
a compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire desig-
nated for temporary emergency use
page 128.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped
Tire And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the
tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this
option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recom-
mended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the
tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the let-
ter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a con-
ventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare
tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire
and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 245
8
Full-Size Spare — If Equipped
The Full-Size spare is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire
on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the
tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tempo-
rary use Full-Size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since
it is not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and rein-
stall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use
spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the
same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire And Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driv-
er’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original equip-
ment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on
your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of
vehicle control.
TIRE ROTATION
RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate
at different loads and perform different steering, han-
dling, and braking functions. For these reasons, they
wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute
to a smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals
page 210.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not
be reversed.
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on
each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause
damage to the power transfer unit. Tire rotation
schedule should be followed to balance tire wear.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National High-
way Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must con-
form to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
246 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the
tire when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The rela-
tive performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart signifi-
cantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and
climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These
grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement, as measured
under controlled conditions on speci-
fied government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead brak-
ing traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire's resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat,
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive tem-
perature can lead to sudden tire fail-
ure. The grade C corresponds to a level
of performance, which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel, than the mini-
mum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Exces-
sive speed, underinflation, or exces-
sive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat build-up
and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three
weeks, we recommend that you take the following steps
to minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:
•
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
•
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of ser-
vice (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system
is started again.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 247
8
NOTE:
When the vehicle has not been started or driven for at
least 30 days, an “Extended Park Starting Procedure” is
required to start the vehicle
page 83.
CAUTION!
Before removal of the positive and negative terminals
to the battery, wait at least a minute with ignition
switch in the OFF position and close the driver’s door.
When reconnecting the positive and negative termi-
nals to the battery be sure the ignition switch is in the
OFF position and the driver’s door is closed.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
AGENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other sea-
sons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle.
Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is
operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other
extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint,
metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corro-
sion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
•
Stone and gravel impact.
•
Insects, tree sap and tar.
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY
MAINTENANCE
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their
luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the
same soap solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle and remember to always wash when the sur-
faces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt
ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or
sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not
use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage
the wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and auto-
matic car washes may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of
tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to
prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar® Wheel Treat-
ment, Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended, or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic
cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to
remove the water droplets from the brake components.
This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors
and prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
248 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.
Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to
maintain this finish.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the
lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a
mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely
with water.
•
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accu-
mulated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super Kleen
Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
•
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to pro-
tect your paint finish. Use precautions to not scratch
the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least
once a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept
clear and open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or simi-
lar cause that destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as
possible.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertiliz-
ers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials
are well packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon
as possible. An authorized dealer has touch up
paint to match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure —
If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•
For tough stains, apply Mopar® Total Clean, or a
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and
remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 249
8
•
For grease stains, apply Mopar® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical sol-
vents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace the
belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do
not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if
you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Pro-
gram facility for inspection.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
•
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away
immediately.
•
Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regu-
lar cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of
dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather
upholstery and should be removed promptly with a
damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with
a soft cloth and Mopar® Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to
clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show
any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more
so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and the manufacturer recommends Mopar®
total care leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean
the leather seats as needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use alcohol and alcohol-based and/or ketone-
based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery,
as damage to the upholstery may result.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive
type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
250 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the wind-
shield and is visible from the outside of the vehicle.
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as
standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost
for any reason (for example, repeated brake applica-
tions with the engine off), the brakes will still function.
However, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be
much greater than that required with the power system
operating.
If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa-
bility, the remaining system will still function with some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident
by increased pedal travel during application and greater
pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, if the
malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the brake
fluid in the master cylinder drops, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the Brake Warning Light on is
dangerous. A significant decrease in braking perfor-
mance or vehicle stability during braking may occur. It
will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make
your vehicle harder to control. You could have a colli-
sion. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided
(hex) deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
100 ft-lb
(135 N·m)
M12 x 1.25 19 mm
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Vehicle Identification Number
Wheel Mounting Surface
251
9
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the
socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not
insert it halfway).
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to
be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly
tightened.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the
engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the
engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see a
dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than
recommended octane number can cause engine failure
and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
2.0L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all emission
requirements, and provide satisfactory fuel
economy and performance, when using
unleaded regular gasoline having an octane
rating of 87, as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The
use of 91 or higher octane premium gasoline will allow
these engines to operate to optimal performance. This
increase in performance is most noticeable in hot
weather or other heavier load conditions, such as while
towing.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner-
burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Use of these blends may result in starting and driv-
ability problems, damage critical fuel system compo-
nents, cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator
Light to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as
they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains
greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing
methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
E-85 USAGE IN NON-FLEX FUEL
VEHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
•
Operate in a lean mode.
•
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
•
Poor engine performance.
•
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
•
Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
Torque Pattern
252 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
MODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Com-
pressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may
result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel
system components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
MANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT)
IN GASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that
is blended into some gasolines to increase octane.
Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance
advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system perfor-
mance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recom-
mends that gasoline without MMT be used in your
vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indi-
cated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask
the gasoline retailer whether or not his/her gasoline
contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and
California reformulated gasoline.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corro-
sion and stability additives are recommended. Using
gasolines that have these additives will help improve
fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to fur-
ther aide in minimizing engine and fuel sys-
tem deposits. When available, the usage of
TOP TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials intended
for gum and varnish removal may contain active sol-
vents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel sys-
tem gasket and diaphragm materials.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-
formance and damage the emissions control
system.
•
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
•
The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most
of these products contain high concentrations of
methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control system
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 253
9
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 13.5 gal 51 L
Engine Oil With Filter
2.0L Engine 5 qt 4.7 L
Cooling System*
2.0L Engine 9 qt 8.6 L
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the
requirements of the manufacturer Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil
We recommend using Mopar® API SP/GF-6A Certified SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic
Engine Oil which meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS-13340. Equivalent full synthetic 5W-30 API SP engine oil can be used but must
have the API Donut trademark
page 214.
CAUTION!
Failure to use the recommended API SP/GF-6A or equivalent oil can cause engine
damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
254 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF8&9Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped
We recommend using Mopar® Front Axle/PTU Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90
(API GL-5).
Rear Differential (RDM) – If Equipped
We recommend using Mopar® Rear Axle/RDM Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90
(API GL-5).
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 255
9
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's ser-
vice history. This can often provide a clue to the current
problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let
the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle (additional charges may apply). If you need a
rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements
when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally inter-
ested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with
our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high qual-
ity service. FCA US LLC’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed cor-
rectly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you
are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or
owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if
you need assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable
to resolve the concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's
Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer center
should include the following information:
•
Owner's name and address
•
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
office)
•
Authorized dealer name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Available 24 hours, 7 days a week.
Call 1-800-521-2779 or visit chrysler.rsahelp.com(USA)
Call 1-800-363-4869 or visit fca.roadsideaid.com
(Canada)
Who is Covered
You are covered by Roadside Assistance services if you
are a purchaser for use of the vehicle. Roadside Assis-
tance services last for five years or 60,000 miles on the
odometer, whichever occurs first, calculated from the
start date of the Basic Limited Warranty, as set forth in
your Warranty Information book.
1
1. Towing services provided through Cross Country Motor Club, Inc.,
400 River's Edge Drive, Medford, MA 02155, except in AK, CA, HI, OR,
WI, and WY, where services are provided by Cross Country Motor Club
of California, Inc., 275 East Hillcrest Drive, Suite 165, Thousand Oaks,
CA 91360.
What to Do
If your vehicle requires jump start assistance, out of
gas/fuel delivery, tire service, lockout service or towing
as a result of a mechanical breakdown, dial toll-free:
USA: 1-800-521-2779/Canada: 1-800-363-4869. Pro-
vide your name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
required for covered services, license plate number,
and your location, including the telephone number from
which you are calling. Briefly describe the nature of the
problem and answer a few simple questions. You will be
given the name of the service provider and an esti-
mated time of arrival. If you feel you are in an unsafe
situation, please let us know. With your consent, we will
contact local police or safety authorities.
If Unable to Contact Roadside Assistance
If you are unable to contact Roadside Assistance or
unable to provide a valid Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and you obtain towing services on your own, you
may submit your original receipts from the licensed tow-
ing or service facility, for services rendered within
256
30 days of the occurrence. Be sure to include your VIN,
odometer mileage at the time of service, and current
mailing address. We will process the claim based on
vehicle and service eligibility. If eligible, we will reim-
burse you for the reasonable amount actually paid,
based on the usual and customary charges for that ser-
vice in the area where they were provided. FCA US LLC’s
determination relating to reimbursement is final. Corre-
spondence should be mailed to:
FCA US LLC Customer Assistance
P.O. Box 9145
Medford, MA 02155
Attention Claims Department
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any
time. The Roadside Assistance program is subject to
restrictions and conditions of use, which are deter-
mined solely by FCA US LLC.
Flat Tire Service
If you are inconvenienced by a flat tire, we will dispatch
a service provider to use your vehicle’s temporary spare
tire (if equipped) as recommended in your Owner’s
Manual. This is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Out of Gas/Fuel Delivery
Drivers cannot always count on a gas station being
nearby, especially when traveling away from home. We
will dispatch a service provider to deliver a small
amount of fuel (maximum two gallons) to get you to a
nearby station. This service is limited to two occur-
rences in a 12-month period.
Battery Jump Assistance
No time is a good time for a depleted battery. With
Roadside Assistance, you do not have to worry about
being stranded. We will dispatch a service provider to
provide you with a battery jump anytime, day or night.
Lockout Service
Whether the keys are locked in your vehicle or frozen
locks are keeping you from getting on your way, help is
just a phone call away. This service is limited to provid-
ing access to the vehicle’s seating area. It does not
cover the cost of replacement keys.
Towing Service
Our towing service gives you peace of mind and confi-
dence. If your vehicle becomes disabled as a result of a
mechanical breakdown, Roadside Assistance will dispatch
a towing service to transport your vehicle to the closest
authorized Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or Ram dealer. If you
choose to go to another dealer, you will be responsible for
the cost if the extra distance exceeds 10 miles.
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CARE
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French
MEXICO
Customer Relations Office
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D.F.
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN
ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC Customer Service
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan, Puerto Rico, 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
HEARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, FCA
US LLC has installed special Telecommunication
Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with FCA
US LLC by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service
offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users,
dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to
connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
pected repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle Protection plans
are the ONLY vehicle extended protection plans autho-
rized, endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 257
10
If you purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you
will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification
Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle deliv-
ery date.
If you have any questions about the service contract,
call FCA US LLC’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
For Canadian residents, you may have purchased addi-
tional coverage with an extended service contract. FCA
Canada Inc. stands fully behind its service contracts.
Be sure that the one you buy is a genuine Canada Inc.
service contract. We are not responsible for other com-
panies’ contracts. If you purchased a contract other
than a genuine FCA Canada Inc. service contract and
you have a problem, you will have to contact the admin-
istrator of that contract for resolution.
If you have any questions about the service contract,
call the FCA's Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract
you may have purchased from another manufacturer. If
you require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those
documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools,
and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted
with the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provi-
sions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for
further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provi-
sions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market. Refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/en/
for further information.
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories and
factory filled fluids are available from an authorized
dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to keep
it operating at its best and maintain its original
condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
WASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or
cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National High-
way Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US
LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in indi-
vidual problems between you, an
authorized dealer, or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Scan me
258 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department immedi-
ately. Canadian customers who wish to
report a safety defect to the Canadian
government should contact Transport
Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investi-
gations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/
7/PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a com-
plete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or
components and is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make
it easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step trouble-
shooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic
tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
To order a digital copy of your Service or Diagnostic Pro-
cedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FCA vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or www.owners.mopar.ca/en/
(Canada).
Or visit:
www.techauthority.com to order physical copies of
Owner’s Manuals (US).
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty Infor-
mation Books can be ordered through Archway at:
•
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Change Of Ownership Or Address
*If you have purchased this vehicle used or have
changed your address, please provide the following
information and mail to:
FCAUSLLC
P.O. Box 21–8008
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Make sure to include the following:
•
Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy)
•
Vehicle Identification Number (17 Character ID
located on top left of the instrument panel)
•
Exact Odometer Reading
•
First and Last Name
•
Phone Number
•
Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
•
Email Address
*Applies to US residents only.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innova-
tion, Science and Economic Development applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation
est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est sus-
ceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 259
10
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
260 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
A
Active Lane Management System .........118
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ............95
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze).........220
Additives,Fuel ..................253
AirBag......................172
Air Bag Operation ...............173
Air Bag Warning Light ...........171,173
Driver Knee Air Bag ..............176
Enhanced Accident Response ......179,209
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ..........209
FrontAirBag .................173
If Deployment Occurs .............178
Knee Impact Bolsters .............176
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ........181
Maintenance .................181
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .......172
Side Air Bags .................176
Transporting Pets ...............189
AirBagLight.................171,189
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter).....................214
Air Conditioner Maintenance ............215
Air Conditioner Refrigerant.............215
Air Conditioner System...............215
Air Conditioning Filter .............47,216
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ...........47
AirFilter......................214
Air Pressure
Tires .....................242
Alarm
Arm The System ................19
Disarm The System ...............20
Security Alarm .................76
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle .....................9
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)..........220, 254
Disposal ...................221
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...........151
Anti-Lock Warning Light ...............76
Arming System
Security Alarm .................19
Assist, Hill Start ..................155
Audio Systems (Radio)...............133
AutoDownPowerWindows.............52
AutoHold......................86
AutomaticDimmingMirror .............32
Automatic Door Locks................23
Automatic Headlights ................38
Automatic High Beams ...............38
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ........47
Automatic Transaxle ................87
Automatic Transmission...............88
AddingFluid...............223, 255
Fluid And Filter Change ............223
Fluid Change .................223
Fluid Level Check ...............222
FluidType ................223, 255
Special Additives ...............222
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode......23
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .......
49
AxleFluid.....................255
Axle Lubrication ..................255
B
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster .......62
Battery ....................75,213
Charging System Light .............75
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ..........15
Battery Saver Feature................73
Belts, Seat ....................189
BlindSpotMonitoring...............157
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...........216
B-Pillar Location..................239
Brake Assist System ................152
Brake Control System, Electronic..........152
Brake Fluid ....................255
Brake System ................222, 251
Anti-Lock (ABS) ................251
Fluid Check ...............222, 255
Master Cylinder ................222
Parking.....................85
Warning Light ..................74
Brake/Transmission Interlock ............88
Brightness, Interior Lights ..............39
Bulb Replacement.................231
Bulbs,Light....................190
C
Camera, Rear ................120, 121
Capacities, Fuel ..................254
Caps, Filler
Fuel......................123
Oil (Engine) ..................212
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..........220
Carbon Monoxide Warning .............191
Cargo Area Cover ..................58
Cargo Load Floor ..................58
Cargo Tie-Downs ................58,59
Car Washes ....................249
261
11
Cellular Phone ..................150
Certification Label.................124
Change Oil Indicator ................67
Changing A Flat Tire ................194
Chart, Tire Sizing .................237
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . . .82
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety..........189
Checks, Safety ..................189
Child Restraint ..................181
Child Restraints
Booster Seats .................183
Child Seat Installation .............188
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .....186
Infant And Child Restraints ...........182
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ....184
Older Children And Child Restraints ......182
Seating Positions ...............183
Child Safety Locks .................23
Clean Air Gasoline.................252
Cleaning
Wheels ....................248
Windshield Wiper Blades ...........216
Climate Control ...................42
Automatic ...................42
Manual .....................45
Cold Weather Operation...............83
Compact Spare Tire ................245
Connector
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .......49
Console ......................48
Floor......................48
Contract, Service .................257
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ........220
Cooling System ..................219
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........220
Coolant Level ..............220, 221
Cooling Capacity ...............254
Disposal Of Used Coolant ...........221
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............220
Inspection ...................221
PointsToRemember .............221
Pressure Cap .................220
Radiator Cap .................220
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .....220, 254
Corrosion Protection................248
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ...........95
Cruise Light ....................80
Customer Assistance ...............256
Cybersecurity ...................133
D
Daytime Running Lights ...............37
Defroster, Windshield ...............190
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ..................37,38
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ..................213
Disabled Vehicle Towing ..............207
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..........221
Door Ajar ......................75
Door Ajar Light ...................75
Driver Memory Seat.................24
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ...............25
Driving......................130
E
Easy Entry Seats ..................28
Electrical Power Outlets ...............49
Electric Brake Control System ...........152
Anti-Lock Brake System ............151
Traction Control System .........155,156
Electric Parking Brake ...............85
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........153
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light.......75
Emergency Braking ................161
Emergency Gas Can Refueling ...........204
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher ............192
Jacking ....................194
Jump Starting .................203
Tow Hooks ..................208
Towing ....................207
Emission Control System Maintenance .......82
Engine ......................212
Air Cleaner ..................214
Break-In Recommendations ...........84
Checking Oil Level ...............213
Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............254
Cooling....................219
Exhaust Gas Caution .............191
Fails To Start ..................84
Flooded, Starting ................84
Fuel Requirements ..............252
Jump Starting .................203
Oil....................214,254
Oil Filler Cap .................212
OilFilter....................214
Oil Selection ...............214,254
Oil Synthetic ..................214
Overheating ..................205
Starting ....................83
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ....179,209
Ethanol ......................252
Exhaust Gas Cautions ...............191
Exhaust System ...............191,219
Exterior Lighting ..................37
Exterior Lights .................37,190
262 INDEX
F
Filters
Air Cleaner ..................214
Air Conditioning ..............47,216
Engine Oil ...................214
Engine Oil Disposal ..............214
Flashers
Hazard Warning ................192
Turn Signals ............37,39,80,190
Flash-To-Pass ..................37,38
Flat Tire Changing ..............236, 245
FlatTireStowage...............236, 245
Flooded Engine Starting ..............84
Floor Console....................48
Fluid, Brake ....................255
Fluid Capacities ..................254
Fluid Leaks ....................191
Fluid Level Checks
Brake .....................222
Engine Oil ...................213
Fog Lights ...................37,38
Fold-Flat Seats ...................25
Folding Rear Seats .................27
Forward Collision
Warning ....................160
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ..............206
Fuel .......................252
Additives ...................253
CleanAir ...................252
Ethanol ....................252
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ..............123
Gasoline ...................252
Light......................77
Materials Added ................253
Methanol ...................252
Octane Rating ..............252, 254
Specifications .................254
Tank Capacity .................254
Fuses.......................223
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ..........34
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap)..............123
Gasoline, Clean Air ................252
Gasoline, (Fuel) ..................252
Gasoline, Reformulated ..............252
Gear Ranges ....................89
Gear Selector Override ..............206
Glass Cleaning ..................250
Gross Axle Weight Rating .............125
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ............125
GVWR.......................124
H
Hazard Warning Flashers .............192
Headlights .....................37
Automatic ...................38
Cleaning ...................249
Delay......................38
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ....37,38
Lights On Reminder .............37,38
Passing ...................37,38
Switch .....................37
TimeDelay.................37,38
Head Restraints ..................30
Head Rests.....................30
Heated Mirrors .................32,33
Heated Seats....................29
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . .38
Highway Assist System ..............105
Hill Descent Control ................155
Hill Descent Control Indicator ...........155
Hill Start Assist ..................155
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ..........34
Hood Prop .....................54
Hood Release ...................54
I
Idle Coasting ..................69,80
Ignition.......................16
Switch .....................16
InsideRearviewMirror.............32, 192
Instrument Cluster .........61,63,64,65,67
Audio......................71
Descriptions ................63, 65
Display.....................65
Display And Messages .............68
Driver Assist ..................70
Fuel Economy .................70
MenuItems ..................69
Messages ...................71
Settings ....................71
StopStart ....................71
TripInfo ....................70
VehicleInfo...................69
Instrument Cluster Display
OffRoad....................70
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ..........250
Interior Appearance Care .............249
Interior Fuses ...................228
Interior Lights ...................39
iPod/USB/MP3 Control...............49
J
Jacking And Tire Changing — If Equipped ...194
Jacking Instructions ................196
Jack Location ...................195
INDEX 263
11
Jack Operation ................194,196
Jump Starting ...................203
K
Key Fob
ArmTheAlarm .................19
Disarm The Alarm ................20
Programming Additional Key Fobs ........15
Remote Keyless Entry ..............14
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .15
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ....15
KeylessEnter'nGo™..............14,21
Keys........................14
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals .........37,39
Lane Change Assist ...............37,39
Lane Management System ............118
LaneSense .....................80
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................166
Latches ......................190
Hood ......................54
Leaks, Fluid ....................191
LifeOfTires....................244
Liftgate.......................55
Hands-Free ...................57
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ...........42
LightBulbs....................190
Lights.......................190
4WD Lock ...................79
4WDLow....................79
Adaptive Cruise Control Set ...........79
AirBag................74,171,189
Anti Lock Brake System .............76
Automatic Headlights ..............38
Automatic High Beam ..............80
Battery Charge .................75
Battery Saver ..................39
Brake Assist Warning .............154
Brake Warning .................74
Bulb Replacement ...............231
Cruise .....................80
Daytime Running ................37
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ..........37,38
Door Open ...................75
Drowsiness Detected ..............75
Electric Power Steering Fault ..........75
Electronic Park Brake ..............76
Electronic Stability Control ...........77
Electronic Throttle Control ............75
Engine Temperature ..............75
Exterior....................190
Fog.....................38,80
Forward Collision Warning ............79
FuelCutoff...................77
Fuel Level Sensor Fail ..............77
Headlights ...................37
Headlight Switch ................37
High Beam .................38,81
High Beam/Low Beam Select ........37,38
Hill Descent Control ...............81
Hill Descent Control Indicator .........155
Hood Open ...................75
Illuminated Entry ................40
Immobilizer Fail VPS Electrical Alarm ......79
Instrument Cluster ...............37
Intensity Control ................39
Interior.....................39
LaneSense ...............77,80,81
Liftgate Open ..................75
Lights On Reminder .............37,38
Low Coolant Level ...............77
LowFuel....................77
Low Washer Fluid ................77
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ......
77
Oil Pressure ..................76
Oil Temperature .................76
Park......................80
Passing ...................37,38
Seat Belt Reminder ...............76
Security Alarm .................76
Service....................231
Service4WD..................78
Service Adaptive Cruise Control .........78
Service Forward Collision Warning ........78
Service Stop Start ...............78
Stop Start Active ................80
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ......78,162
Towing Hook Breakdown ............79
Traction Control ................154
Transmission Fault ...............76
Transmission Temperature ...........76
Turn Signals ............37,39,80,190
VanityMirror ..................32
Load Floor, Cargo ..................58
Loading Vehicle ..................124
Tires .....................239
Locks
AutoUnlock ..................23
Child Protection .................23
Power Door ...................21
Low Tire Pressure System .............162
Lubrication, Body .................216
Luggage Carrier ..................59
Lug Nuts/Bolts ..................251
M
Maintenance ....................54
Maintenance Free Battery .............213
264 INDEX
Maintenance Schedule ..............210
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) .....77
Manual
Service....................259
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) ..........24
Memory Seat ....................24
MemorySettings..................24
Methanol .....................252
Mirrors.......................32
AutomaticDimming...............32
Heated ...................32,33
Outside ...................32, 33
Rearview .................32, 192
Vanity .....................32
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle .....................9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...........162
Mopar Parts ...................258
Multi-Function Control Lever.............37
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period ............84
O
Occupant Restraints................165
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ........252, 254
Oil, Engine ..................214,254
Capacity ...................254
Checking ...................213
Dipstick ....................213
Disposal ...................214
Filter .....................214
Filter Disposal .................214
Identification Logo ...............214
Materials Added To ..............214
Pressure Warning Light .............76
Recommendation ............214,254
Synthetic ...................214
Viscosity ...................254
Oil Filter, Change .................214
Oil Filter, Selection.................214
Oil Pressure Light ..................76
Onboard Diagnostic System .............81
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ................259
Outlet
Power .....................49
Outside Rearview Mirrors ............32,33
Overheating, Engine ................205
P
Paddle Shifters ...................90
Paint Care.....................248
Parking Brake ...................85
ParkSense
FrontAndRear ................108
ParkSense Active Park Assist ...........113
ParkSense System ................108
Pedestrian Warning System ............161
Pets .......................189
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......239
Power
Door Locks ...................21
Liftgate .....................56
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ........49
Sunroof ....................53
Windows....................52
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ..........170
Preparation For Jacking ..............195
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ...................170
ProfileSettings..................134
Programmable Features ..............133
R
Radial Ply Tires ..................243
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)........220
Radio
Settings....................133
Sound Setting .................146
Radio Operation ..................150
Radio Remote Controls ..............150
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ............41
RearCamera...................120
RearCrossPath..................159
Rear Seat Reminder Alert .............151
Rear Seats, Folding .................27
Rear Wiper/Washer.................42
Recreational Towing ................129
Reformulated Gasoline ..............252
Refrigerant ....................216
Release, Hood ...................54
Reminder, Lights On ..............37,38
Reminder, Seat Belt ................165
Remote Control
Starting System .................17
Remote Keyless Entry ................14
ArmTheAlarm .................19
Disarm The Alarm ................20
Programming Additional Key Fobs ........15
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control .......150
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode .............18
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . . .18
Uconnect Settings ...............18
Remote Starting System ..............17
Replacement Tires ................244
INDEX 265
11
Reporting Safety Defects .............258
Restraints, Child..................181
Restraints, Head ..................30
Roll Over Warning ..................8
Roof Type Carrier ..................59
Rotation, Tires...................246
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle............189
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...........190
Safety Defects, Reporting .............258
Safety, Exhaust Gas ................191
SafetyInformation,Tire..............236
SafetyTips....................189
Sailing .......................69
Sailing Active ....................69
Schedule, Maintenance ..............210
Seat Belt Reminder .................76
Seat Belts ..................165,189
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ............168
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .....168
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . .168
Child Restraints ................181
Energy Management Feature .........170
Extender ...................169
Front Seat .............165,166,167
Inspection ..................189
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ..........167
Lap/Shoulder Belts ..............166
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting .........168
Operating Instructions .............167
Pregnant Women ...............170
Pretensioners .................170
Rear Seat ...................166
Reminder ...................165
Seat Belt Extender ...............169
Seat Belt Pretensioner .............170
Untwisting Procedure .............168
Seat Belts Maintenance ..............250
Seats .......................25
Adjustment ...................25
Easy Entry ...................28
Head Restraints ................30
Heated .....................29
Memory ....................24
RearFolding ................25,27
Seatback Release ..............26, 27
Tilting .....................25
Ventilated ...................29
Security Alarm .................19,76
Arm The System ................19
Disarm The System ...............20
Security System ..................19
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........254
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..............16
Service Assistance ................256
Service Contract..................257
Service Manuals .................259
Shifting
Automatic Transmission .............88
Shift Lever Override ................206
Shoulder Belts ..................166
Side View Mirror Adjustment ..........32,33
Signals, Turn .............
37,39,80,190
SnowTires....................245
Spare Tires .................245,246
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ................254
Oil ......................254
Starting ....................17,83
Automatic Transmission .............83
Button .....................16
Cold Weather ..................83
Engine Fails To Start ..............84
Remote.....................17
Starting And Operating ...............83
Starting Procedures ................83
Steering
Column Controls ................37
TiltColumn...................24
Wheel, Heated .................24
Wheel, Tilt ...................24
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...........150
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . .150
Storage ......................48
Storage, Vehicle ..................47
Stuck, Freeing...................206
SunRoof....................53,54
SunVisor......................32
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag .....172
Surround View Camera System ..........121
Sway Control, Trailer ................156
Synthetic Engine Oil ................214
System, Remote Starting ..............17
T
Telescoping Steering Column ............24
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ........47
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo .............58, 59
Tilt Steering Column ................24
Time Delay
Headlight ..................37,38
Tire And Loading Information Placard .......239
TireMarkings...................236
Tires ...............190,242,245,246
Aging (Life Of Tires) ..............244
Air Pressure ..................242
Changing ...................194
Compact Spare ................245
General Information ...........242,245
266 INDEX
High Speed ..................242
Inflation Pressure ...............242
Jacking ....................194
LifeOfTires..................244
Load Capacity .................239
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ....78,162
Quality Grading ................246
Radial .....................243
Replacement .................244
Rotation ....................246
Safety..................236, 242
Sizes .....................237
SnowTires ..................245
Spare Tires ................245,246
Spinning ...................243
TrailerTowing.................128
Tread Wear Indicators .............243
Wheel Nut Torque ...............251
TireSafetyInformation ..............236
TireServiceKit..................199
Tire Service Kit — If Equipped
........199
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...........127
To Open Hood ...................54
Tow Hooks
Emergency ..................208
Towing......................125
Disabled Vehicle ................207
Guide.....................126
Recreational .................129
Weight ....................126
Towing Behind A Motorhome............129
Traction Control ...............155,156
Traffic Sign Assist System .............103
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .............156
TrailerTowing...................125
Minimum Requirements ............127
Tips......................129
Trailer And Tongue Weight ...........127
Wiring.....................128
TrailerTowingGuide................126
TrailerWeight...................126
Transaxle
Automatic ...................87
Operation ...................87
Transfer Case
Fluid .....................255
Transmission ....................88
Automatic.................88,222
Fluid .....................255
Maintenance .................222
Transporting Pets .................189
Tread Wear Indicators ...............243
Turn Signals ................37,39,80
U
Uconnect
Uconnect Settings ...............18
Uconnect Settings .................133
Customer Programmable Features .......18
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ............246
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector ....49
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®)
If Equipped
................34
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ..........168
V
VanityMirrors....................32
Vehicle Loading ...............124,239
Vehicle Maintenance ...............214
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...........9
Vehicle Security Alarm ...............19
Vehicle Security System...............19
VehicleSettings..................133
Vehicle Storage ...................47
Ventilated Seats ..................29
VoiceCommand..................31
Voice Recognition System (VR) ...........31
W
Warnings, Roll Over .................8
Warranty Information
.............258
Washers, Windshield .............40, 213
Washing Vehicle..................249
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ............248
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim.............248
WindBuffeting...................53
Window Fogging ..................47
Windows......................52
Close......................52
Down......................52
Open ......................52
Power .....................52
Up.......................52
Windshield Defroster ...............190
Windshield Washers ..............40, 213
Fluid .....................213
Windshield Wiper Blades .............216
Windshield Wipers .................40
Wipers Blade Replacement ............216
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ...............41
Wireless Charging Pad ...............50
INDEX 267
11
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do
not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident
and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention
o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while
the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle
is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states
or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for
common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (USA), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your
local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-877-426-5337 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or
purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal
minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may
also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and
equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make
additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Radio Instruction
Manual and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and
conditions of use, that are determined solely by FCA US LLC.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.
Vehicle images are for illustration purposes only. Actual products sold may vary.
First Edition
00_MP_OM_EN_USC
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of
your Jeep
brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly
to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
©2023 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaUSA
mopar.com/om
COMPASS
COMPASS
| OWNER’S MANUAL
